Westlaw MIDDLE EAST - Summary Page

User: IP USER
Client ID: wgukaltamimi-1
Date: APRIL 14 2020
Time: 12:38:06
Content Type: Legislation

Document
EG LAW No. 131 of 1948

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 1
 Status: Law in force

EG LAW No. 131 of 1948

Law No. (131) Of 1948 Promulgating the Civil Code

Article 1 Promulgation

The civil code, issued on 28 October 1883 and applied by the national courts of law as well as the civil code
applied by the mixed courts "Tribunaux Mixte d'Egypte" and issued on 28 June 1875, shall be repealed and
superseded by the attached Civil Code.

Article 2

The Minister of Justice shall enforce this Code, and it shall come into full force and effect as from 15 October
1949.

We hereby decree that this Code be stamped with the State seal, published in the official gazette, and be applied
as an effective law of the State.

Signed

Signed

Issued in Ras Al-Qub Palace, 9 Ramadan 1367 (16 July 1948)

(Al-Waqa'i al-Masriya, issue No. 108 bis (A)

Issued on July 29, 1948

One Section General Provisions

The Code and its Application

1. The Law and Rights

Article 1

1. Legislative Provisions shall govern all matters to which these provisions apply in letter or spirit.

2. In the absence of a provision of a law that is applicable, the Judge shall decide according to custom and in the
absence of custom in accordance with the principles of Sharia. In the absence of such principles, the Judge will
apply the principles of natural justice and the rules of justice.

Article 2

A provision of a law can only be repealed by a subsequent law expressly providing for such repeal, or
containing a provision inconsistent with a provision of the former law or regulating anew a matter previously

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 2
regulated by a former law.

Article 3

Dates shall be calculated according to the Gregorian calendar, unless expressly provided otherwise by a law.

Article 4

A person legitimately exercising his rights is not responsible for prejudice resulting thereby.

Article 5

The exercise of a right is considered unlawful in the following cases:

a. If the sole aim thereof is to harm another person;
b. If the benefit it is desired to realize is out of proportion to the harm caused thereby to another person;
c. If the benefit it is desired to realize is unlawful.

2. The Application of Law

Article 6 Conflicts of Law as to Time

1. Legislative provisions as regards the legal competence of a person are applicable to all persons who fulfill the
conditions embodied in such provisions.

2. When a person, who was deemed to possess legal competence in accordance with the provisions of a former
law, becomes legally incapable in accordance with the provisions of a new law, such legal incapacity does not
affect the validity of acts previously done by him.

Article 7

New legislative provisions as regards prescription shall apply from such time as they come into force in all
cases in which the period of prescription has not been completed.

Former legislative provisions however, apply as regards the date of commencement of prescription, its
suspension and its interruption in respect of the period prior to the application of the provisions of the new law.

Article 8

When the new law provides for a period of prescription shorter than the period provided for in the former law,
the new period will apply from the date the new law came into force, even if the old period of prescription has
already commenced to run.

If, however, the remaining period still to run under the former law is shorter than that fixed by the new law, the
prescription shall be completed upon the expiry of such remaining period.

Article 9

Proof established in advance is governed by provisions of the law in force at the time when the proof was
established or at the time when such proof should have been established.

Article 10 Conflicts of Law as to Place

Egyptian law will rule to determine the nature of a legal relationship in order to ascertain the law applicable in
the event of a conflict between various laws in any particular suit.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 3
Article 11

1. The civil status and the legal competence of persons are governed by the law of the country to which they
belong by reason of their nationality. If, however, in a transaction of a pecuniary nature, concluded and having
effect in Egypt, one of the parties is a foreigner without legal competence and such lack of capacity is due to a
reason that is not apparent and which cannot be easily detected by the other party, this reason has no effect on
his legal competence.

2. The legal status of foreign juristic persons such as companies, associations, foundations, or others, is subject
to the law of the State in whose territory such juristic persons have established their actual principal seat of
management. If, however, a juristic person carries on its principal activities in Egypt, Egyptian law will be
applied.

Article 12

The fundamental conditions relating to the validity of marriage are governed by the (national) law of each of the
two spouses.

Article 13

1. The effects of marriage, including its effects upon the property of the spouses, are regulated by the law of the
country to which the husband belongs at the time of conclusion of the marriage.

2. Repudiation of marriage is governed by the law of the country to which the husband belongs at the time of
repudiation, whereas divorce and separation are governed by the law of the country to which the husband
belongs at the time of the commencement of the legal proceedings.

Article 14

If, in the cases provided for in the two preceding articles one of the two spouses is an Egyptian at the time of the
conclusion of the marriage, Egyptian law alone shall apply except as regards the legal competence to marry.

Article 15

Obligations as regards payment of alimony to relatives are governed by the (national) law of the person liable
for such payment.

Article 16

The (national) law of a person who should be protected shall apply in respect of all fundamental matters relating
to natural and legal guardianship, receivership, and other forms of protection of persons without legal
competence and of absent persons.

Article 17

1. Inheritances, wills and other dispositions taking effect after death shall be governed by the (national) law of
the legator, the testator or the person disposing of property at death.

2. The form of a will, however, is governed by the (national) law of testator at the time the will is made, or by
the law of the country in which the will is made. The same principles apply to the form of other dispositions
taking effect after death.

Article 18

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 4
Possession, ownership and other real rights are regulated, as regards immovable, by the law of the place in
which the immovable is situate, and as regards movables, by the law of the place where the movable was situate
at the time when the event occurred which resulted in the acquisition or loss of possession, ownership or other
real rights.

Article 19

1. Contractual Obligations are governed by the law of the domicile when such domicile is common to the
contracting parties, and in the absence of a common domicile by the law of the place where the contract was
concluded. These provisions are applicable unless the parties agree, or the circumstances indicate that it is
intended to apply another law.

2. Contracts relating to immovable, however, are governed by the law of the place in which the immovable is
situated.

Article 20

Contracts between living persons are governed as regards their form by the law of the country in which the
contracts are concluded. They may also be governed by the law regulating the basic provisions of a contract, by
the law of the domicile of the parties or by their common national law.

Article 21

1. Non-contractual obligations are governed by the law of the State in whose territory the act that gave rise to
the obligation took place.

2. When, however, the obligation arises from a tort, the provisions of the preceding paragraph shall not apply to
an act which occurred abroad and which, although considered unlawful in accordance with the law of the
country in which the act occurred, is considered lawful in Egypt.

Article 22

Principles of jurisdiction of courts and all questions of procedure are governed by the law of the country in
which the action is brought, or in which the proceedings are taken.

Article 23

The provisions of the preceding articles only apply when no provisions to the contrary are included in a special
law or in an International Convention in force in Egypt.

Article 24

The principles of private international law apply in the case of a conflict of laws for which no provision is made
in the preceding articles.

Article 25

1. In the case of a person of unknown nationality or of a person of plural nationality, the law to be applied will
be decided by the Judge.

2. Egyptian law shall apply, however, if a person is deemed in Egypt to be of an Egyptian nationality and is at
the same time deemed by one or more foreign states to be a national of that or those states.

Article 26

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 5
When, in accordance with the preceding provisions, it appears that the law to be applied is the law of a state in
which several legal systems exist, the law applicable shall be determined by the internal law of that state.

Article 27

In the cases where a foreign law is applicable only the internal provisions of such foreign law shall apply to the
exclusion of provisions relating to private international law.

Article 28

The provisions of a foreign law applicable by virtue of the preceding articles shall not be applied if these
provisions are contrary to public policy or to morality in Egypt

Section II Persons

1. Natural Person

Article 29

1. Legal personality commences from the time a child is born alive and ends at death.

2. The law, however, determines the rights of a child en ventre de sa mere.

Article 30

1. Birth and death are established by means of official registers specially kept for this purpose.

2. In the absence of such proof, or if the inaccuracy of the entries in these registers is established, proof may be
established by any other means.

Article 31

Registers of and declarations connected with births and deaths are regulated by a special law.

Article 32

Missing person and absent persons are subject to provisions contained in special laws; in the absence of such
special laws, Moslem law will be applied.

Article 33

Egyptian nationality is governed by a special law.

Article 34

1. The family of a person is composed of his relatives.

2. Persons having a common ascendant are deemed to be relatives.

Article 35

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 6
1. Direct lineal relationship is the relationship existing between ascendants and descendants.

2. Collateral relationship is the relationship existing between persons who have a common ascendant without
one of them being a descendant of the other.

Article 36

The degree of relationship will be calculated, as regards direct lineal relationship, by ascending to the common
ancestor and counting each relative excluding the common ancestor. The degree of relationship will be
calculated, as regards collateral relationship by ascending from the descendant to the common ancestor, then
descending to the other descendant. Each relative, excluding the common ancestor counts for one degree.

Article 37

The relatives of either of the two spouses are deemed to be relatives of the other spouse, in the same line and of
the same degree.

Article 38

Every person must have a first name and a family name. The family name of a person is bestowed upon his
children.

Article 39

Acquisition and change of family name will be governed by special legislation.

Article 40

1. A domicile is the place where a person habitually resides.

2. A person may have more than one domicile at the same time, as he may have none.

Article 41

The place where a person exercises a trade or profession is considered as his domicile as regards matters carried
on in connection with such trade or profession.

Article 42

1. The domicile of a minor, a person under legal disability, a missing person or an absent person will be the
domicile of his legal representative.

2. A minor who has attained eighteen years and a person in a similar legal position shall nevertheless have his
special domicile in respect of acts he is capable of performing in accordance with the law.

Article 43

1. An elected domicile may be designated for the performance of a specific legal act.

2. The election of domicile must be evidenced by writing.

3. A domicile elected for the performance of a legal act shall be deemed to be the domicile in so far as all
matters relating to such act are concerned, including the procedure for enforcement by legal means unless the
election of domicile is expressly limited to certain special acts, excluding others.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 7
Article 44

1. All persons attaining majority in possession of their mental faculties and not under legal disability, have full
legal competence to exercise their civil rights.

2. The majority of a person is fixed at twenty-one years completed in accordance with the Gregorian calendar.

Article 45

1. A person devoid of discretion, owing to youth, feeble mindedness or insanity is incapable of exercising his
civil rights.

2. A person who has not attained the age of seven is considered devoid of discretion.

Article 46

A person who has reached the age of discretion but has not attained majority and a person who has attained his
majority but is a prodigal or an imbecile, has a limited legal competence according to the provisions of the law.

Article 47

Persons deprived of full or partial legal competence are governed, as the case may be, by the rules of natural or
legal guardianship or curatorship subject to the conditions and in accordance with the rules laid down by law.

Article 48

No person may renounce his legal competence or modify the rules relating thereto.

Article 49

No person may renounce his personal liberty.

Article 50

A person, whose rights inherent in his personality have been unlawfully infringed, shall have the right to
demand the cessation of the infringement and compensation for any damage sustained thereby.

Article 51

A person whose right to the use of his name is unlawfully disputed by another, or a person whose name is
unlawfully used by another shall have the right to demand cessation of the infringement and compensation for
any damage sustained thereby.

2. Juristic person

Article 52

Juristic persons are:

1. The state, the provinces, towns and villages in accordance with the provisions fixed by law;
administrations, departments and other public institutions to which the law has granted the status of
juristic persons.
2. Religious groups and communities which the state has recognized as juristic persons.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 8
3. Awqaf (endowments);
4. Commercial and civil corporations.
5. Associations and foundations created in accordance with the subsequent provisions hereof.
6. Any group of persons or properties recognized as juristic persons by virtue of a provision of the law.

Article 53

1. A juristic person enjoys, within the limits established by law, all rights, with the exception of those rights,
which are inherent in the nature of an individual

2. A juristic person shall have:

a. its own financial liability;
b. legal competence, within the limits fixed by its constitution or established by law;
c. the right to sue;
d. its own domicile. This domicile is the place where its seat of management is situated. A corporation
whose seat of management is situated abroad but operates in Egypt, is deemed, in accordance with
internal law, to have its seat of management at the place where its local seat of management is situated.
3. A juristic person shall have a representative to express its will.

Article 54 NGOs

Articles 54 through 80 inclusive have been repealed.

Article 55

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. In order to incorporate an association, articles of association shall be drafted and signed by the founding
members.
2. The articles of association shall include the following data:
a. Name, purpose and headquarters of the association, provided that such headquarters is located at
Egypt;
b. Name, surname, nationality, occupation and domicile of each founding member;
c. Resources of the association;
d. The bodies representing the association and their respective competences, methods of appointment
and removal of the members composing such bodies; and
e. Rules to be followed upon the amendment to the articles of association of the association.

Article 56

Repealed.
The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956
1. The articles of association of the association may not stipulate that its funds shall, upon dissolution,
devolve to the members or their heirs or families.
2. This provision shall not apply to the funds only allocated to the Mutual Aid Fund or the Pension Fund.

Article 57

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. The association may not have property rights or any other rights to real estate, except to the extent
necessary for realizing the purpose for which it is established.
2. This provision shall not apply to the associations which are exclusively intended for charitable or
educational purposes, or which are exclusively intended for conducting scientific research.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 9
Article 58

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. The legal personality of the association shall be established once the association is established.
2. Such legal personality shall not be invoked vis-#-vis third parties, except after the registration of the
articles of association of the association.

Article 59

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. Registration shall be made in the manner prescribed by law.
2. However, negligence in the registration or evasion from officially establishing the existence of the
association shall not prevent third parties from invoking the effects of legal personality against the
association.
3. However, each association not registered, not properly established or secretly established shall, however,
comply with the pledges made by its directors or employees. Such pledges may be fulfilled from the
association's funds, whether derived from the subscriptions of its members or from any other source.

Article 60

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

Any amendment to the articles of association of the association shall be registered in accordance with the
provisions of Article (59). The amendment shall not be effective vis-#-vis third parties, except from the time
when such registration is made.

Article 61

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

The approval of the budget and the final account, any amendment to the articles of association of the association
and the voluntary dissolution thereof shall be based on a resolution issued by the general assembly.

Article 62

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. All active members shall be invited to the general assembly.
2. The resolutions of the general assembly shall be taken by the relative majority of the present and
represented members, unless the articles of association of the association stipulates otherwise.
3. However, the deliberations of the general assembly with regard to the amendment to the articles of
association or the resolution on the voluntary dissolution of the association shall not be valid, unless such
matters are included in the agenda attached to the notice of invitation. The resolutions shall be issued by
the absolute majority of the members of the association with respect to the amendment to the articles of
association and by the two-thirds majority of the members of the association with respect to the
dissolution of the association or any amendment to the articles of association regarding the purpose of the
association, unless the articles of association stipulates a larger majority.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 10
Article 63

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. Each resolution issued by the general assembly in contrary to the law or the articles of association of the
association may be annulled by virtue of a judgment rendered by the Court of First Instance within whose
jurisdiction the headquarters of the association is located. The action for annulment shall be instituted by
one of the members, any other stakeholder, or the Public Prosecution within six (6) months from the date
of issuance of such resolution.
2. However, the action for annulment may not be instituted against bona fide third parties that have acquired
rights on the basis of the said resolution.

Article 64

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. The acts of the directors of the association, beyond their competences or in violation of the provisions of
the law, the articles of association of the association or the resolutions of the general assembly, may be
annulled by a judgment from the Court of First Instance within whose jurisdiction the headquarters of the
association is located, at the request of one of the members or the Public Prosecution.
2. The action shall be instituted within one year from the date of the act to be annulled.
3. The action for annulment may not be instituted against bona fide third parties that have acquired rights on
the basis of such act.

Article 65

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. Each member may, unless he has undertaken to remain in the association for a certain period, withdraw
therefrom at any time.
2. The withdrawing member and the dismissed member shall have no rights to the funds of the association,
except in the cases where there is a joint fund as set out in the second paragraph of Article (56). In such
cases, the articles of association of the association may stipulate otherwise.

Article 66

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. The association may, by virtue of a judgment rendered by the Court of First Instance within whose
jurisdiction the headquarters of the association is located, at the request of one of the members, any other
stakeholder or the Public Prosecution, be dissolved if the association fails to fulfill its obligations, if the
association allocates its funds or profits for purposes other than those for which it is established or if a
serious violation of its articles of association, the law or the public order is committed.
2. The Court may, if it rejects the request for dissolution, annul the act in question.

Article 67

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

If the association is dissolved, one or more liquidators shall be appointed by the general assembly in case of
voluntary dissolution or by the Court in case of judicial dissolution.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 11
Article 68

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. After the completion of the liquidation process, the liquidator shall distribute the remaining funds in
accordance with the provisions of the articles of association of the association.
2. If there is no provision in the articles of association of the association to this effect, or if there is a
provision to this effect but the distribution method stipulated therein is not possible, the general assembly,
in case of voluntary dissolution, and the Court, in case of judicial dissolution, shall decide to transfer the
funds of the dissolved association to an association or a foundation whose purpose is closest to the
purpose of such association.

Civil Code

Introductory Part: General Provisions

Chapter II Persons

2. Legal Persons

Foundations

Article 69

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

A foundation is a legal person established by the allocation of funds for an indefinite period of time for a
humanitarian, religious, scientific, artistic or sporting work or for any other charitable or public benefit work,
without seeking financial profit.

Article 70

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. The foundation shall be established by an official deed or by a will.
2. Such deed or will shall be deemed as the constitution of the foundation and shall include the following
data:
a. The name and headquarters of the foundation, provided that such headquarters is located at Egypt;
b. The purpose for which the foundation is established;
c. An accurate statement of the funds allocated for this work; and
d. The organization structure of the foundation.

Article 71

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

The establishment of the foundation shall, with respect to the creditors and heirs of the founder, be deemed as a
gift or a will. If the foundation raises detrimental effects on their rights, they may institute the actions prescribed

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 12
by the law in such cases in respect of the gifts and wills.

Article 72

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

If the foundation is established by an official deed, the founder thereof may dissolve the same by another
official deed, until it is registered in accordance with the provisions of Article (59).

Article 73

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. The foundation shall be registered at the request of its founder, its first director or the foundations
supervisory authority.
2. The foundations supervisory authority shall take the necessary registration procedures from the time of
being informed of the establishment of the foundation.
3. The provisions of Articles (58), (59) and (60) shall apply to foundations.

Article 74

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

The State has the right to control foundations.

Article 75

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

The directors of the foundation shall provide the supervisory authority with the foundation's balance sheet and
annual accounts along with the supporting documents, and shall also provide any other information or data
requested by that authority.

Article 76

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

The Court of First Instance within whose jurisdiction the headquarters of the foundation is located may, at the
request of the supervisory authority in the form of an action, order the following:
a. Dismissing the directors who; are found to be negligent or incompetent, fail to fulfill the obligations
imposed thereon by the law or by the foundation's deed, use the funds of the foundation in a manner
inconsistent with the purpose of the foundation or the purpose of the establishment thereof or commit any
other grave mistake in the course of performing their duties;
b. Amending the management system of the foundation, reducing the costs and the conditions prescribed in
the foundation's deed, or amending or abolishing the same if this is necessary to preserve the funds of the
foundation or necessary to realize the purpose of the establishment thereof;
c. Ordering the termination of the foundation if it becomes unable to achieve the purpose for which it was
established, or if such purpose is not achievable, or is contrary to the law, morals or public order; and
d. Annulling the acts performed by the directors, beyond their competences or in violation of the provisions

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 13
 of the law or the articles of association of the foundation. In such case, the action for annulment shall be
instituted within two years from the date of the act in question without prejudice to the rights of the bona
fide third parties that have acquired rights on the basis of such act.

Article 77

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. The Court shall, upon ordering the termination of the foundation, appoint a liquidator and decide what
will become of the remaining funds after liquidation, as stipulated in the deed of the foundation.
2. If the transfer of the funds to the entity provided for in the deed of the foundation is not possible or if the
entity is not identified in the deed, the court shall decide a destination for the funds as close as possible to
the purpose for which the foundation is established.

Article 78

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

The provisions of foundations set out in the present Code shall not apply to the foundations established by
endowment.

Civil Code

Introductory Part: General Provisions

Chapter II Persons

2. Legal Persons

Common Provisions of Associations and Foundations

Article 79

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

1. Associations intended for realizing public interest and foundations may, at their request, be considered as
entities performing public interest work by virtue of a Decree approving the articles of association thereof.
2. Such Decree may provide for the exemption of the association from the eligibility restrictions stipulated in
Article (57).
3. The Decree may impose special control procedures, such as the appointment of one or more directors
from the government body or any other action deemed necessary.

Article 80

Repealed.

The final text of the Article dated: 03/11/1956

Charities, cooperatives, social institutions and societies shall be regulated by the Code.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 14
Section III Classification of Objects and Property

Article 81

1. Anything that is not outside the scope of trade by its nature of by virtue of the law, may be the object of
proprietary rights.

2. Things outside the ambit of trade by their very nature are things that cannot be objects of exclusive
possession. Things outside the ambit of trade by law are things which, in accordance with the law, cannot be
objects of proprietary rights.

Article 82

1. Things which are fixed and which cannot be removed without damage are immovable. All other things are
movables.

2. A movable placed by its owner in an immovable owned by him with the intention of serving or exploiting
such immovable is considered an immovable by reason of its destined use.

Article 83

1. All real rights over immovable property including the right of ownership and all suits relating to a real right
over an immovable are deemed to be immovable property.

2. All other proprietary rights are deemed to be movable property.

Article 84

1. Consumable things are those things whose utility, by reason of their destined use, consists in their
consumption or disposal.

2. All things destined for sale in commercial establishments are deemed to be consumable.

Article 85

Fungibles are those things which can be replaced one by another in a payment and which it is customary in
trade to estimate by number, measure, volume or weight.

Article 86

Rights in respect of a non-material object are regulated by special laws.

Article 87

Final text of the Article dated: 17/06/1954

1. Immovable and movable property owned by the State or public legal persons and, ipso facto, ipso jure or
by virtue of a decree or a resolution from the competent minister, allocated for public benefit shall be
deemed public property.
2. Such immovable and movable property may not be disposed of, attached or acquired by prescription.

Article 88

Final text of the Article dated: 17/06/1954

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 15
Public property shall lose its public status if it ceases to be allocated for public benefit. The allocation shall be
terminated by virtue of a law a decree, or a resolution from the competent minister, ipso facto, or if the purpose
for which such property is allocated for public benefit ceases to exist.

Part 1 Personal Obligations or Rights

Book 1 Obligations in General

Chapter 1 Sources of Obligation

Section 1 Contract

1: Elements of the Contract

Article 89 Acceptance

A contract is deemed to be made, subject to any special formalities stipulated by the law for its conclusion, from
the moment the two persons have expressed their mutual concordant intentions.

Article 90

(1) An intention may be expressed verbally, in writing, by signs in general use, and also by such course of
action as, in the circumstances of the case, leaves no doubt as to its true meaning.

(2) Expression of intention may be implied when neither the law nor the parties require it to be expressed.

Article 91

Expression of intention becomes effective from the time it comes to the knowledge of the person to whom it is
addressed, who, subject to proof to the contrary, shall be deemed to have knowledge of the expression of
intention from the time it comes to his knowledge.

Article 92

Where the person who has expressed the intention dies or becomes legally incompetent before the expression of
intention takes effect, the expression of intention shall not be less effective at the time it comes to the
knowledge of the person to whom it was addressed, unless the contrary is shown by the expression of intention
or by the nature of the dealing.

Article 93

(1) When a time limit is fixed for acceptance, the person who makes the offer is bound to maintain his offer
until the expiration of the time limit.

(2) The time limit may be inferred from the circumstances or from the nature of the dealing.

Article 94

1. If, at the time a contract is being negotiated, an offer is made without a time limit being fixed for acceptance,
the party making the offer shall be relieved from his offer if it is not accepted forthwith. This also applies, if the
offer is made by one person to another person by telephone or by any other similar means.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 16
2. However, a contract is concluded, even if acceptance is not immediate, when, during the interval between
offer and acceptance, there is nothing to indicate that the party making the offer has withdrawn his offer and the
declaration of acceptance is made before the end of the meeting at which the contract was being framed.

Article 95

where the parties have agreed on all the essential points of a contract and have left certain details to be agreed at
a later date without stipulating that failing agreement on these details, the contract shall not be concluded, the
contract is deemed to have been concluded, and the points of detail will, in the event of dispute, be decided
upon by the court according to the nature of the transaction, to the provisions of the law, custom and justice.

Article 96

An acceptance that goes beyond the offer, or that is accompanied by a restriction or modification, is deemed to
be a rejection involving a new offer.

Article 97

(1) In the absence of agreement or a provision of the law to the contrary, a contract between persons who are not
present at the time is deemed to have been concluded at the place where and at the time when the party making
the offer became aware of the acceptance.

(2) The party making the offer is supposed to have had knowledge of the acceptance at the place and at the time
the acceptance in communicated to him.

Article 98

(1) In the event a party making the offer could not, by reason of the nature of the transaction, in accordance with
commercial usage, or on account of other circumstances, have anticipated a formal acceptance, the contract is
deemed to have been concluded, if the offer is not refused within a reasonable time.

(2) Failure to reply is equivalent to acceptance when the offer relates to dealings already existing between the
parties, or when the offer is solely in the interests of the party to which the offer is addressed.

Article 99

A contract of sale by public auction is only concluded when the final award is made. A bid is nullified from the
moment a higher bid is made, even if the higher bid is void.

Article 100

Acceptance in the case of a contract of adhesion is confined to adhesion to standard conditions which are drawn
up by the party making the offer and which are not subject to discussion.

Article 101

(1) An agreement under which the two parties, or either of them, promise to enter into a particular contract in
the future, is only binding if all the essential points of the contract envisaged and the time when the contract
should be concluded are stated.

(2) When the law provides that a contract shall not be valid unless a certain form is observed, this form must
also be observed in any agreement embodying a promise to enter into such a contract.

Article 102

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 17
If a party, who has promised to enter into a contract, refuses to do so, and the other party takes legal proceedings
against him to enforce the promise, and the conditions required for the conclusion of the contract, especially
those as to the form, exist, the judgment will, upon becoming final, replace the contract.

Article 103

(1) Unless otherwise provided in the agreement, the payment of earnest money at the time the contract is
concluded indicates that either party may withdraw from the contract.

(2) The person who has paid the earnest money and withdrawn from the contract shall lose the earnest money,
and the person who has received earnest money and withdraws from the contract shall repay twice the amount
of the earnest money, even if the withdrawal does not cause any damage.

Article 104

(1) Where a contract is entered into by a representative, such representative, and not the principal, will be the
person who will be looked to in examining the question of vices of consent, or the effects attached to the fact
that the contracting party knew or should necessarily have been aware of certain special circumstances.

(2) When, however, the representative is an agent who acted in accordance with the principal's precise
instructions, the principal cannot plead the ignorance of his representative of circumstances which the principal
knew or should have necessarily known.

Article 105

When a contract is concluded by a representative within the limits of his authority in the name of his principal,
the rights and obligations resulting therefrom will be in favor of and binding upon the principal.

Article 106

When a contracting party did not disclose at the time of the conclusion of a contract that he is acting as a
representative, the contract only operates in favor of or binds the principal, if the third party with whom the
representative contracted should necessarily have known that the contracting party was the representative of the
principal, or if it was of no importance to the third party whether he entered into the transaction with the
principal or with the representative.

Article 107

If a representative and a third party with whom the representative concluded a contract were both unaware at the
time the contract was concluded of the extinction of the representation, the effects of the contract concluded by
the representative, whether they involve rights or obligations, revert to the principal or his successor in title.

Article 108

Except where otherwise provided by law or by commercial rules, no one may contract with himself in the name
of the person he represents, either for his own benefit or for that of a third party, without the authority of his
principal, who, nevertheless, in such a case, may ratify the contract.

Article 109

Every person, who has not been declared to be under total or partial legal incapacity, has the legal competence
to conclude a contract.

Article 110

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 18
A minor lacking discretion has not the legal competence to dispose of his property. All his acts in law are
deemed to be void.

Article 111

(1) Contracts and other disposition of property entered into by a minor possessing discretion are valid when
wholly to his advantage and void when wholly to his disadvantage.

(2) Dispositions of property which may be, at the same time, profitable and detrimental, may be annulled, if this
is in the interest of the minor. Annulment cannot be claimed if the act is ratified by the minor upon attaining his
majority or by his guardian or by the court, as the case may be, in accordance with the law.

Article 112

A minor possessing discretion, who has attained the age of eighteen years and has been authorized to take
possession of his property in order to manage it, or has taken possession of his property by virtue of law, may
validly perform acts of management within the limits of the law.

Article 113

The courts shall limit the legal competence and lift the interdiction imposed on all persons suffering from
insanity, mental derangement or imbecility, and prodigals, in accordance with the rules and the procedure
prescribed by law.

Article 114

(1) An act entered into by a person suffering from insanity or mental derangement after the registration of the
sentence of interdiction is null.

(2) An act made before the registration of the sentence of interdiction is null only if the state of insanity or
derangement was a matter of common notoriety at the time the contract was entered into or if the other party
had knowledge thereof.

Article 115

(1) An act entered into by a person placed under interdiction for imbecility or prodigality after the registration of
the sentence of interdiction, will be governed by the provisions regulating acts performed by minors possessing
discretion.

(2) An act entered into before the registration of the sentence of interdiction shall only be void or voidable if
unfair advantage has been taken of the condition of the person under interdiction or if there has been fraudulent
collision.

Article 116

(1) The constitution of a waqf (an endowment), or the execution of a will by a person placed under interdiction
for prodigality or for imbecility is valid, if the interdicted person has been duly authorized by the court.

(2) Acts of management carried out by a person placed under interdiction for prodigality, who has been
authorized to take possession of his property, are valid within the limits provided by the law.

Article 117

(1) If a person is deaf and dumb, deaf and blind or blind and dumb, and cannot, by reason of his infirmity,
express his will, the court may appoint a judicial adviser to assist him in connection with such acts as may be

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 19
necessary in his interests.

(2) An act for which the assistance of a judicial adviser has been ordered is voidable, if the act is performed by
the person provided with a judicial adviser without the assistance of such adviser, after the registration of the
decision providing for such assistance.

Article 118

An act by a legal guardian, custodian or a curator shall be valid within the limits provided by law.

Article 119

A person lacking legal competence, may demand the invalidation of the contract, subject, however, to his
liability to payment of damages if he has employed fraudulent methods to conceal his legal incapacity.

Article 120

A party to a contract may demand the avoidance of the contract if he committed an essential mistake, if the
other party committed the same mistake or had knowledge thereof, or could have easily detected the mistake.

Article 121

(1) A mistake is of an essential nature when its gravity is of such a degree that, if it had not been committed, the
party who was mistaken, would not have concluded the contract.

(2) The mistake is deemed to be essential more particularly:

A. When it has a bearing on the quality of the thing, which the parties have considered essential or which
must be deemed essential, taking into consideration the circumstances surrounding the contract and the
good faith that should prevail in business relationships.
B. When it has a bearing on the identity or on one of the qualities of the person with whom the contract is
entered into, if this identity or this quality was the principal factor in the conclusion of the contract.

Article 122

In the absence of a provision of the law to the contrary, a mistake in law entails the invalidity of the contract, if
the mistake fulfills the elements of a mistake of fact in accordance with the two preceding articles.

Article 123

Mere mistakes of calculation or clerical mistakes do not affect the validity of a contract; these errors must,
however, be corrected.

Article 124

(1) A party who has committed a mistake cannot take advantage of the mistake in a manner contrary to the
principles of good faith.

(2) Such a party, moreover, remains bound by the contract, which he intended to conclude, if the other party
shows that he is prepared to perform the contract.

Article 125

(1) A contract may be declared void on the grounds of fraudulent misrepresentation, when the artifices practiced
by one of the parties, or by his representative are of such gravity that, but for them, the other party would not

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 20
have concluded the contract.

(2) Intentional silence on the part of one of the parties as to a fact or as to the accompanying circumstances
constitutes fraudulent misrepresentation if it can be shown that the contract would not have been concluded by
the other party had he had knowledge thereof.

Article 126

A party who is the victim of fraudulent misrepresentation by a third party can only demand the avoidance of the
contract, if it is established that the other contracting party was aware of, or should necessarily have been aware
of, the fraudulent misrepresentation.

Article 127

(1) A contract is voidable as a result of duress, if one of the parties has contracted under the stress of justifiable
fear unlawfully instilled in him by the other party.

(2) Fear is deemed to be justified when the party who invokes it has been led to believe, in view of the
circumstances, that a serious and imminent danger to life, limb, honor or property threatened him or others.

(3) In appreciating the extent of duress, the sex, age, social position and the condition of health of the victim
should be taken into consideration, as well as any other circumstance that might have aggravated the duress.

Article 128

When the duress is practiced by a person other than one of the contracting parties, the victim cannot demand the
avoidance of the contract, unless it is established that the other contracting party had, or should necessarily have
had, knowledge thereof.

Article 129

(1) If the obligations of one of the contracting parties are out of all proportion to the advantages that he obtains
from the contract or to the obligations of the other contracting party, and it is established that the party who has
suffered the prejudice entered into the contract only as a result of the other party exploiting his obvious levity of
character or his unbridled passion, the judge may, at the request of the party so prejudiced, annul the contract or
reduce the obligations of such party.

(2) Proceedings instituted on such grounds shall be barred unless commenced within one year from the date of
the contract.

(3) In a contract entered into for valuable consideration, the other party may avoid annulment proceedings by
making such an offer as the judge may consider adequate compensation to cover the lesion.

Article 130

The preceding article shall apply subject to special provisions of the law relating to lesion in certain contracts,
and to the provisions of the law as regards rates of interest.

Article 131 Object of Contract

(1) Things that may happen in the future may be the object of an obligation.

(2) An agreement with regard to the succession of a living person is void, even if he consents to such an
agreement, except in cases provided for by law.

Article 132

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 21
If the object of an obligation is something impossible in itself, the contract shall be void.

Article 133

(1) When the object of an obligation is not certain as to its nature, it must at least be determinate as to its kind
and quantity, as otherwise the contract is void.

(2) The object of an obligation may, however, only be determinate as to kind, if the contract provides a method
of ascertaining the quantity. If there is no agreement as to the degree of quality and the quality cannot be
ascertained by usage or by any other circumstances, the debtor must supply an article of average quality.

Article 134

When the object of an obligation is a sum of money, the debtor is bound only to the extent of the actual figure of
the sum of money stated in the contract, whatever be the increase or decrease in the value of such money at the
date of payment.

Article 135

A contract shall be void if its object is contrary to public order or morality.

Article 136 Cause

A contract is void when an obligation is assumed without a cause or for a consideration contrary to public order
or morality.

Article 137

1. An obligation is deemed to have lawful consideration, even if such consideration is not expressed in the
contract, unless the contrary is proved.

2. The consideration expressed in the contract is deemed to be the true consideration until evidence to the
contrary is produced. Upon evidence being produced that the consideration is feigned, the onus falls on the
person who maintains that the obligation has another lawful consideration of proving his contention.

Article 138 Invalidity

When the law recognizes the right of either of the contracting parties to procure the avoidance of the contract,
the other party cannot avail himself of such right.

Article 139

(1) The right to procure avoidance of the contract is extinguished by an express or implied ratification of the
contract.

(2) Ratification is retroactive to the date of the contract, without prejudice to the rights of third parties.

Article 140

(1) The right to procure the avoidance of a contract is prescribed, if not invoked within three years.

(2) This period runs, in case of legal incapacity, from the date of the cessation of such incapacity; in the case of
mistake or fraudulent misrepresentation, from the date the mistake or misrepresentation is discovered; in the
case of duress, from the date it has ceased. In no case can avoidance be claimed as a result of mistake,
fraudulent representation or duress, when fifteen years have elapsed from the date of the conclusion of the

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 22
contract.

Article 141

(1) When a contract is void, its nullity may be invoked by every person having an interest in the contract and
such nullity may also be ordered by the court on its own initiative. Nullity cannot disappear by ratification of the
contract.

(2) Nullity proceedings are prescribed after fifteen years from the date of the conclusion of the contract.

Article 142

(1) Where a contract is void and null, the parties shall be reinstated to their position prior to the contract. If such
reinstatement is impossible, damages equivalent to the loss may be awarded.

(2) When, however, a contract concluded by a person without legal competence is annulled by reason of his lack
of capacity, he shall only be liable to refund such profits as he derived from the performance of the contract.

Article 143

When part of a contract is void or voidable, that part alone will be annulled, unless it is established that the
contract would not have been entered into without such a part, in which case the contract will be void as a
whole.

Article 144

When a void or voidable contract contains the elements of another contract, the contract will be deemed to be
valid to the extent of the other contract, if it appears that the parties intended to conclude such another contract.

2: The Effects of a Contract

Article 145

Subject to the rules relating to successions, the effects of a contract apply to the parties and to their universal
successors in title, unless it follows from the contract, from the nature of the transaction or from a provision of
the law, that the effects of the contract do not pass to the universal successors in title of a party.

Article 146

Obligations and personal rights created by contracts relating to property that has subsequently been transferred
to particular successors in title are transferred to such particular successors in title together with the property,
when such obligations and rights constitute essential elements of the property and the particular successors in
title had knowledge at the time of the transfer of the property to them.

Article 147

(1) The contract makes the law of the parties "Pacta sunt servanda". It may be revoked or altered only by mutual
consent of the parties or for reasons provided for by law.

(1) When, however, as a result of exceptional and unpredictable events of a general character, the performance
of the contractual obligation, without becoming impossible, becomes excessively onerous in such way as to
threaten the debtor with exorbitant loss, the judge may according to the circumstances, and after taking into
consideration the interests of both parties, reduce to reasonable limits, the obligation that has become excessive.
Any agreement to the contrary is void.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 23
Article 148

(1) A contract must be performed in accordance with its contents and in compliance with the requirements of
good faith.

(2) A contract binds the contracting party not only as regards its expressed conditions, but also as regards
everything which, according to law, usage and equity, is deemed, in view of the nature of the obligation, to be a
necessary sequel to the contract.

Article 149

When a contract of adhesion contains leonine conditions, the judge may modify these conditions or relieve the
adhering party of the obligation to perform these conditions in accordance with the principles of equity. Any
agreement to the contrary is void.

Article 150

(1) When the wording of a contract is clear, it cannot be deviated from in order to ascertain by means of
interpretation the intention of the parties.

(2) When a contract has to be construed, it is necessary to ascertain the common intention of the parties and to
go beyond the literal meaning of the words, taking into account the nature of the transaction as well as that
loyalty and confidence which should exist between the parties in accordance with the custom widely recognized
in transactions.

Article 151

(1) In cases of doubt the construction shall be in favor of the debtor.

(2) The construction, however, of obscure clauses in a contract of adhesion must not be detrimental to the
adhering party.

Article 152

A contract does not create obligations binding upon third parties, but may create rights in their favor.

Article 153

(1) A person who binds himself to procure the performance of an obligation by a third party, does not in so
doing bind the third party. If the third party refuses to perform the obligation, the person who bound himself to
obtain such performance will be liable to indemnify the other contracting party by himself performing the
obligation, the performance of which he undertook to procure.

(2) In the event of the third party consenting to perform the obligation, his consent is effective only from the
time that it is given, unless it is indicated expressly or by implication that the consent is retroactive as from the
date of agreement between the contracting parties.

Article 154

(1) A person may by a contract in his own name stipulate that an obligation shall be performed for the benefit of
a third party, when he has a personal interest, material or moral, in the performance of such an obligation.

(2) As a result of such a stipulation and in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the third party
beneficiary acquires a direct right against the person who undertook to perform the obligation, and may call
upon him to do so. The person who gave the undertaking may set up against the beneficiary the defenses arising

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 24
out of the contract.

(3) The stipulating party may also demand the performance of the obligation in favor of the beneficiary, unless
it appears from the contract that performance may only be demanded by the beneficiary.

Article 155

(1) The stipulator himself, but not his creditors or heirs, may revoke the stipulation for a third party, provided
that the revocation is made before the beneficiary advises the debtor or the stipulator of his wish to have the
benefit of the stipulation, and that the revocation is not contrary to the provisions of the contract.

(2) In the absence of any express or implied agreement to the contrary, the revocation does not liberate the
debtor vis-a-vis the stipulator. The stipulator may substitute a new beneficiary in the place of the former
beneficiary, or may retain for himself the benefit of the stipulation.

Article 156

A stipulation in favor of a third party may be made in favor of future persons or institutions, and also in favor of
persons or institutions who are not identified at the date of the contract, provided that these persons or
institutions can be identified at the date when the effects of the contract come into operation in accordance with
the stipulation.

3: Rescission of Contract

Article 157

(1) In bilateral contracts (contrats synallagmatiques), if one of the parties does not perform his obligation, the
other party may, after serving a formal summons on the debtor, demand the performance of the contract or its
rescission, with damages, if due, in either case.

(2) The judge may grant additional time to the debtor, if it is necessary as a result of the circumstances. The
judge may also reject an application for rescission when the part of the contract which the debtor has failed to
perform is of little importance in comparison with the obligation in its entirety.

Article 158

The parties may agree that in case of non-performance of the obligations flowing from the contract, the contract
will be deemed to have been rescinded ipso facto without a court order. Such an agreement does not release the
parties from the obligation of serving a formal summons, unless the parties expressly agree that such a summons
will be dispensed with.

Article 159

When an obligation arising out of a bilateral contract is extinguished by reason of impossibility of performance,
correlative obligations are also extinguished and the contract is rescinded ipso facto.

Article 160

When a contract is rescinded, the parties are reinstated in their former position. If reinstatement is impossible,
the court may award damages.

Article 161

When, in the case of bilateral contract, correlative obligations are due for performance, either of the contracting

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 25
parties may abstain from the performance of his obligation, if the other party does not perform his obligation.

Section 2 Unilateral Will

Article 162

1. A person who makes a promise to the public of a reward in exchange for a specified service is bound to pay
the reward to the person who performs the service, even if he acted without thought of the promise of reward, or
without knowledge thereof.

2. When the person who made the promise does not fix a period of time for the performance of the service, he
may withdraw his promise by means of a notice to the public, but such withdrawal will not affect the rights of a
person who has already performed the service. The right of action for the reward will be forfeited, if such action
is not lodged within six months from the date of publication of the notice of withdrawal.

Section 3 Illegal Act

1: Liability for Personal Acts

Article 163

(1) Every fault, which causes injury to another, imposes an obligation to make reparation upon the person by
whom it is committed.

(2) When an injury is caused by a person not in possession of discretion, the judge may, if no one is responsible
for him, or if the victim of the injury cannot obtain reparation from the person responsible, condemn the person
causing the injury to pay equitable damages, taking into account the position of the parties.

Article 164

Every person in possession of discretion is responsible for his unlawful acts.

Article 165

In the absence of a provision of the law or an agreement to the contrary, a person is not liable to make
reparation, if he proves that the injury resulted from a cause beyond his control, such as unforeseen
circumstances, force majeure, the fault of the victim or of a third party.

Article 166

A person who causes an injury to another in the legitimate defense of his person or property, or of the person or
property of a third party, is not responsible, provided that he does not exceed the measures necessary for his
defense, as otherwise he will be liable to damages assessed in accordance with the principles of equity.

Article 167

A public official is not responsible for an act by which he causes injury to another person, if he acted in
pursuance of an order received from a superior, which order he had to obey or thought he had to obey, and if he
shows that he believed that the act he performed was lawful, that he had reasonable grounds for such belief and
that he acted with care.

Article 168

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 26
A person who causes injury to another person, in order to avoid greater injury that threatens him or a third party,
is only responsible for such damages as the judge deems equitable.

Article 169

When several persons are responsible for an injury, they are jointly and severally responsible to make reparation
for the injury. The liability will be shared equally between them, unless the judge fixes their individual share in
the damage due.

Article 170

The judge shall decide, in accordance with the provisions of Articles (221) and (222) and in the light of
circumstances, the extent of the damages for the loss suffered by the victim. If the judge is not in a position at
the time of the judgment to fix definitely the extent of the injury, he may allow the victim a delay within which
he may claim reassessment of the damages.

Article 171

(1) The judge shall decide the method of payment of damages in accordance with the circumstances. The
damages may be paid by installments, or in the form of a regular periodical payment, in either of which cases
the debtor may be ordered to provide security.

(2) Damages will consist of a money payment. Upon the demand of the victim, however, the judge may, in
accordance with the circumstances, order that the damage be made good by restoration of the original position,
or by the performance of a particular action that has connection with the unlawful act by way of compensation.

Article 172

(1) An action for damages arising from an unlawful act is prescribed after three years from the date upon which
the victim knew of the injury and the identity of the person who was responsible. An action for damages is
prescribed in any case after fifteen years from the date on which the unlawful act was committed.

(2) When a claim arises out of a penal offence and the penal action is not prescribed after the delays set out in
the preceding paragraph, the action for damages is only prescribed when the penal action itself is prescribed.

2: Liability for a Third Party's Act

Article 173

(1) A person who is, by law or by agreement, entrusted with the supervision of a person who, on account of his
minority or his mental or physical condition, requires supervision, is liable for damages for injuries caused to a
third party by unlawful acts of the person under his supervision. The responsibility exists even when the person
causing the injury, is a person who is deprived of discretion.

(2) A minor is deemed to require supervision until he has attained fifteen years or if, having attained that age, he
is under the care of a person in charge of his upbringing. The supervision of a minor is the responsibility of his
school teacher of the person under whose supervision he works during the time he is under the care of such
teacher or of such person under whom he works. The supervision of a wife who is a minor is the responsibility
of her husband or of the person who is responsible for the supervision of the husband.

(3) A person who is entrusted with the supervision of another person may escape liability by proving that he
performed his duty of supervision or that the injury could not have been prevented, even if he had exercised the
necessary care.

Article 174

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 27
(1) An employer is liable for the damage caused by an unlawful act of his employee, when the act was
performed by the employee in the course, or as a result, of his job.

(2) The relationship between employer and employee exists even when the employer has not been free to
choose his employee, provided he has actual powers of supervision and control over his employee.

Article 175

A person responsible for an act of another person has a claim for redress against that other person to the extent
that the other person is responsible for the reparation of the injury.

3: Liability Arising from Things

Article 176

A person in charge of an animal, even if he is not its owner, is liable for any harm done by the animal, even if
the animal strays or escapes, unless such person shows that the accident was due to force majeure in which he
played no part.

Article 177

(1) A person in charge of a building, even if he is not its owner, is liable for damage caused by the collapse of
the building, even if such collapse is only partial, unless he shows that the accident did not occur as a result of
negligent maintenance or the age of, or a defect in the building.

(2) A person who is in danger of damage from a building is entitled to call on the owner to take the necessary
precautions to prevent the danger, and if the owner fails to take such precautions, to obtain an order from the
court authorizing him to take the necessary precautions himself at the cost of the owner.

Article 178

Whoever is in charge of a thing whose supervision requires special care, or of a machine, is liable for damage
caused by it, unless he shows that the damage was due to a cause beyond his control, subject always to any
special provisions of the law in this respect.

Section 4 Unjust Enrichment

Article 179

A person, even one lacking discretion, who without legitimate cause enriches himself to the detriment of
another person, is liable, to the extent of his profit, to compensate such other person for the loss sustained by
him. This obligation remains, even if the profit has disappeared at a later date.

Article 180

A claim for compensation for enrichment without legitimate cause shall be prescribed after three years from the
date on which the injured party knew of his right to be compensated and in any case after fifteen years from the
date that the right first arose.

1: Undue Payment

Article 181

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 28
(1) Whoever receives, by way of payment, an object which is not owing to him, is bound to return it.

(2) There is, however, no obligation to restitute when the payer knew that he was not under an obligation to pay,
unless he was legally incapable or unless he paid under duress.

Article 182

A payment which was not due may be recovered, if it was made in the performance of an obligation whose
cause had not materialized or had ceased to exist.

Article 183

(1) Restitution may also be made of a payment effected in the performance of an obligation which had not at the
time fallen due, if the payer was not aware that payment was not then due.

(2) A creditor may, however, limit the restitution to the profit he has gained as a result of the premature payment
to the extent of the loss suffered by the debtor. When the obligation which has not fallen due is for a sum of
money, the creditor must restitute to the debtor interest thereon at the legal or at an agreed rate for the time to
run until the due date of payment.

Article 184

Restitution is not due of a payment effected by a person other than the debtor, if the creditor, acting in good
faith, has in consequence of such payment given up his document of title, or his security or allowed his claim
against the real debtor to be prescribed. The real debtor must in such a case indemnify the third party who made
the payment.

Article 185

(1) When a person has received, in good faith, that which is not due to him, he is bound only to restitute that
which he has received.

(2) If he has received in bad faith, he is bound to restitute in addition the interest and profit that he has gained or
that he has failed to gain by neglect on the thing unduly received, from the date of payment or from the date he
became of bad faith.

(3) In any case, a person who has received that which is not due to him, is bound to restitute the interest and
profit thereon from the date of a claim in the courts.

Article 186

When a person who has received that which was not due to him has not the legal competence to enter into a
contract, he is bound only to the extent of his profit.

Article 187

A claim for restitution of a payment unduly received is prescribed after three years from the day on which the
payer knew of his right to claim restitution and in any case after fifteen years from the date upon which the right
arose.

2: Negotiorum Gestio

Article 188

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 29
Negotiorum Gestio is where a person of his own accord knowingly assumes the management of an urgent
business of another person and on that person's behalf without being bound to do so.

Article 189

Negotiorum Gestio exists even when a voluntary agent "gestor" manages the affairs of another person whilst at
the same time looking after his own business, because of a connection between the two businesses of such a
kind that one of them cannot be managed separately from the other.

Article 190

The rules of agency shall apply where the Principal approves the gestor's act.

Article 191

A gestor must complete the work he has commences until the Principal is in a position to do so himself. He
must also, as soon as he is able to do so, inform the Principal of his intervention.

Article 192

(1) A gestor must use in the management of the work he has undertaken all the care that one would expect from
a reasonable person and shall be responsible for his mistakes. The judge may, however, reduce the amount of
damages due as a result of such mistakes, if circumstances justify such a reduction.

(2) When a gestor delegates to a third party the whole or part of the work of which he has assumed the
management, he shall be responsible for the acts of his delegate, without prejudice to the right of the Principal
to his direct remedy against the delegate.

(3) When there are several gestors doing the same work, they are all jointly responsible.

Article 193

A gestor is bound by the same obligations as a mandatory as regards the restitution of that which he received as
a result of his management and as regards rendering accounts thereof.

Article 194

(1) In the event of death of a gestor, his heirs are bound by the same obligations as those of a mandatory in
accordance with the provisions of paragraph 2 of Article (717).

(2) In the event of the death of the Principal, the gestor is bound by the same obligations to the heirs as he was
to the person of whom they were the successors in title.

Article 195

A gestor is deemed to be the representative of the person for whom he has acted, if he has devoted to the
management of the work the care of a reasonable person, even if the object in view has not been achieved. The
person for whom the gestor has acted will be bound to carry out the obligations entered into on his behalf by the
gestor, to indemnify him against all undertakings assumed by him, to reimburse him monies usefully or
necessarily expended by him which are justified by the circumstances together with interest thereon from the
date of expenditure, and to indemnify him in respect of any loss he has suffered as a result of his management.
The gestor is not entitled to any remuneration for his work, unless the work comes within the scope of his
professional business.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 30
Article 196

(1) If a gestor is not legally incompetent to enter into contracts, he will only be responsible for his management
to the extent of his profit therefrom, provided that his liability does not result from an unlawful act.

(2) The person for whom the gestor acts remains, however, fully responsible, even if he himself is legally
incapable of entering into a contract.

Article 197

A claim arising from Negotiorum Gestio shall be prescribed after three years from the day on which each party
had knowledge of his right and in any case after fifteen years from the day on which the right arose.

Section 5 The Law

Article 198

Obligations arising directly from the law only shall be governed by the provisions of the law giving rise to such
obligations

Chapter 2 Effects of Obligation

Article 199

(1) An obligation is enforceable against the debtor.

(2) The performance of a natural obligation, however, cannot be enforced.

Article 200

The judge shall decide, in the absence of any provision of the law, whether a natural obligation exists. In any
case, no natural obligation shall be in contrary to the public order.

Article 201

A debtor cannot claim restitution of that which he has voluntarily given to another with the object of
discharging a natural obligation.

Article 202

A natural obligation may constitute a valid cause for a civil obligation.

Section 1 Specific performance

Article 203

(1) A debtor shall be compelled, upon being summoned to do so in accordance with Articles (219) and (220),
specifically to perform his obligation, if such performance is possible.

(2) When, however, specific performance is too onerous for the debtor, he may limit performance to payment of
a sum of money as indemnity, provided that this method of performance does not seriously prejudice the
creditor.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 31
Article 204

Subject to the rules with regard to transcription, an obligation to transfer ownership or any other real right
transfers ipso facto that right, if the object of obligation is specifically identified and is owned by the debtor.

Article 205

(1) When an obligation to transfer a real right has for its object a thing which is described only as regards its
species, the right is not transferred, unless the object is identified as regards its individuality.

(2) If, however, the debtor does not perform his obligation, the creditor may, upon an order of the judge, or in
case of urgency even without such an order, acquire, at the expense of the debtor, an article of the same kind: he
may also claim the value of the articles without prejudice to his right to compensation, in either case.

Article 206

An obligation to transfer a real right includes that of the delivery of the article and of the preservation thereof up
to the time of delivery.

Article 207
1. When a debtor is under an obligation to transfer a real right or to do something which comprises an
obligation to deliver a thing, he will be responsible, should he fail to deliver the thing after having been
formally summoned to do so, for the loss thereof, even if the risk of loss prior to the issue of the
summons, was the liability of the creditor.
2. The risk of loss, however, does not pass to the debtor, even upon the issue of a formal summons, if he
establishes that the thing would also have perished in the keeping of the creditor if it had been delivered to
him unless the debtor has accepted to take accidental loss at his own risk.
3. The risk of loss of a stolen thing, no matter how the thing perishes is lost, is the responsibility of the thief.

Article 208

When the contract or the nature of the obligation demands that the obligation to do something shall be
performed by the debtor personally, the creditor may refuse the performance of the obligation by any person
other than the debtor.

Article 209

(1) In the case of non-performance by the debtor of an obligation to do something, the creditor may apply to the
court for an order to carry out the obligation at the cost of the debtor, if this is possible.

(2) In a case of urgency, the creditor may carry out the obligation at the cost of the debtor without an order from
the court.

Article 210

When the nature of the obligation so permits, a judge may, in case of an obligation to do something, take the
place of the performance of the contract.

Article 211

(1) Subject always to any provision of the law or agreement to the contrary in the case of an obligation to do
something, a debtor who is required to preserve a thing, to manage it or to act with prudence in the performance
of his obligation, satisfies his obligation, if he brings to the performance thereof the care of a reasonable person,
even if the object in view is not achieved.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 32
(2) The debtor always remains liable for fraud or gross negligence.

Article 212

When a debtor infringes an obligation to refrain from doing something the creditor may demand the suppression
of that which he has done in contravention of his obligation. The creditor may apply to the court for an order
authorizing him to proceed himself with such suppression at the cost of the debtor.

Article 213
1. When the specific performance of an obligation is impossible or not practicable, unless performed by the
debtor himself, the creditor may obtain a judgment ordering the debtor to perform the obligation, and to
pay a penalty if he abstains from performing his obligation.
2. If the judge finds that the amount of the penalty is insufficient to make the debtor perform his obligation,
he may increase the penalty each time that he considers that is desirable to do so.

Article 214

After specific performance has been carried out or when a debtor has persisted in his refusal to perform the
obligation, the judge shall fix the amount of damages that the debtor shall pay, taking into account the prejudice
suffered by the creditor and the unjustifiable attitude of the debtor.

Article 215

When specific performance by the debtor is impossible, he will be ordered to pay damages for non-performance
of his obligation, unless he establishes that the impossibility of performance arose from a cause beyond his
control. The same principle will apply, if the debtor is late in the performance of his obligation.

Section 2 Performance by Way of Compensation

Article 216

The judge may reduce the amount of damages or may even refuse to allow damages if the creditor, by his own
fault, has contributed to the cause of, or increased, the loss.

Article 217
1. The debtor may by agreement accept liability for unforeseen events and for cases of force majeure.
2. The debtor may by agreement be discharged from all liability for his failure to perform the contractual
obligation, with the exception of liability arising from his fraud or gross negligence. The debtor may,
nevertheless, stipulate that he shall not be liable for fraud or gross negligence committed by persons
whom he employs for the performance of his obligation.
3. Any clause discharging a person from responsibility for unlawful acts, is void.

Article 218

Unless otherwise provided, compensation shall not be due unless a formal notice is served upon the debtor.

Article 219

A debtor is formally summoned by a summons served through the court or by an equivalent act. The summons
may be by post in the manner provided for in the Code de Procedure or may result from an agreement
stipulating that the debtor shall be considered to be in default by the mere fact of the expiration of the time
period without any other formality being required.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 33
Article 220

A formal summons to the debtor will not be necessary in the following cases:
a. If the performance of the obligation becomes impossible or without interest by an act of the debtor.
b. If the object of the obligation is the payment of damages in respect of an unlawful act.
c. If the object of the obligation is the restitution of a thing that the debtor knew to have been stolen or of a
thing that he received knowing that it was not due to him.
d. If the debtor declares in writing that he does not intend to perform his obligation.

Article 221
1. The judge will fix the amount of damages, if it has not been fixed in the contract or by law. The amount of
damages includes losses suffered by the creditor and profits of which he has been deprived, provided that
they are the normal result of the failure to perform the obligation or of delay in such performance. These
losses shall be considered to be a normal result, if the creditor is not able to avoid them by making a
reasonable effort.
2. When, however, the obligation arises from a contract, a debtor who has not been guilty of fraud or gross
negligence will not be held liable for damages greater than those which could have normally been
foreseen at the time of entering into the contract.

Article 222
1. Damages also include compensation for moral prejudice. The right to compensation for moral prejudice
cannot, however, be transmitted to a third party, unless it has been fixed by agreement or unless it has
been the subject of legal proceedings.
2. The judge may award compensation for moral prejudice only to spouses and to relatives up to the second
degree, by reason of grief caused to them by the death of the victim.

Article 223

The parties may fix in advance the amount of damages either in the contract or in a subsequent agreement,
subject to provisions of Articles (215) to (220).

Article 224
1. Damages fixed by agreement are not due, if the debtor establishes that the creditor has not suffered any
loss.
2. The judge may reduce the amount of these damages, if the debtor establishes that the amount fixed was
grossly exaggerated or that the principal obligation has been partially performed.
3. Any agreement contrary to the provisions of the two preceding paragraphs is void.

Article 225

When the loss exceeds the amount fixed by the contract, the creditor cannot claim an increased sum, unless he is
able to prove that the debtor has been guilty of fraud or gross negligence.

Article 226

When the object of an obligation is the payment of a sum of money of which the amount is known at the time
when the claim is made, the debtor shall be bound, in case of delay in payment, to pay to the creditor, as
damages for the delay, interest at the rate of four percent in civil matters and five percent in commercial matters.
Such interest shall run from the date of the claim in court, unless the contract or commercial usage fixes another
date. This Article shall apply, unless otherwise provided in law.

Article 227
1. The parties may agree upon another rate of interest either in the event of delay in effecting payment or in

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 34
 any other case in which interest has been stipulated, provided that it does not exceed seven percent. If the
parties agree to a rate exceeding seven percent, the rate will be reduced to seven percent and any surplus
that has been paid shall be refunded.
2. Any commission or other consideration of whatsoever nature stipulated by the creditor which, together
with the agreed interest, exceeds the maximum limits of interest set out above, will be considered as
disguised interest and will be subject to reduction, if it is not established that this commission or this
consideration is in respect of a service actually rendered by the creditor or of a lawful consideration.

Article 228

Moratory interest, whether fixed by law or by agreement, is due without the creditor being obliged to prove loss
as a result of delay.

Article 229

If a creditor, whilst claiming his rights, has in bad faith prolonged the duration of the litigation, the judge may
reduce the legal or contractual interest or may refuse to allow interest for the whole of the period during which
the litigation has been unjustifiably prolonged.

Article 230

In a distribution of the price of expropriated property, creditors admitted to the distribution will only be entitled,
as from the date of sale by auction, to moratory interest on amounts allocated to them in the distribution, if the
successful bidder is bound to pay interest on the price, or if the Court's treasury is bound to pay interest as a
result of the deposit of the price at it, and only to the extent that the interest received by the creditor in such case
does not exceed the amount due vis-a-vis the successful bidder or the court's treasury. Such interests shall be
distributed amongst all the creditors pro rata.

Article 231

A creditor may demand damages in addition to interest if he establishes that a loss, in excess of the interest, was
due to bad faith on the part of the debtor.

Article 232

Subject to any commercial rules or practice to the contrary, interest does not run on outstanding interest and in
no case shall the total interest that the creditor may collect exceed the amount of the capital.

Article 233

The legal rate of commercial interest on current accounts varies according to the local market rate applicable,
and capitalization is effected on current accounts according to the commercial customs.

Section 3 Enforcement Means and Guarantee Means to Secure the Creditors' Rights

Article 234
1. The debts of a debtor are secured by all his property.
2. Subject to any right of preference acquired in accordance with law, all creditors are treated as regards this
security on a footing of equality.

1. Means of Enforcement

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 35
Article 235
1. Every creditor, even if his claim has not fallen due, may exercise in the name of his debtor all his debtor's
rights of action save only those that are purely personal or cannot be attached.
2. The exercise by a creditor of the rights of his debtor is not admissible, unless the creditor proves that the
debtor himself has not exercised such rights and that the debtor's failure to do so is such as to result in or
increase his insolvency. The creditor need not necessarily formally summon the debtor to exercise his
rights but he must always join the debtor in the proceedings.

Article 236

A creditor, in the exercise of his debtor's right, is deemed to be the debtor's representative. The proceeds
resulting from the exercise of such rights fall into the property of the debtor and serve as security to all his
creditors.

Article 237

Any creditor whose claim has fallen due and whose debtor has entered into an act of alienation prejudicial to
him may demand that such an act be declared void so far as he is concerned, if such act has either diminished
the debtor's rights or increased his obligations, and has in consequence resulted in. or increased, his insolvency,
when the conditions provided for in the following Article are all present.

Article 238
1. If the act by the debtor is for valuable consideration it can only be held invalid as against the creditor, if
made by the debtor with the intent to defraud and if the other party to the contract was aware of the fraud.
It suffices for the act to be considered fraudulent, if the debtor knew, at the time that it was effected, that
he was insolvent: the other party is deemed to have had knowledge of the fraud of the debtor, if he was
aware of the debtor's state of insolvency.
2. If, however, the act entered into by the debtor was gratuitous, it is not valid as against the creditor, even if
the transferee acted in good faith and it is established that the debtor did not commit fraud.
3. If a transferee disposes of property transmitted to him by a debtor for valuable consideration, a creditor
can only claim avoidance of the act by the debtor if it was made for valuable consideration and if the
second as well as the first transferee both knew of the debtor's fraud, and when the act by the debtor was
gratuitous and the second transferee knew of the insolvency of the debtor at the time the debtor entered
into the act in favor of the first transferee.

Article 239

A creditor who alleges the insolvency of his debtor has only to establish the amount of his debts. It is for the
debtor to prove that his assets are equal to or exceed his liabilities.

Article 240

Once an act has been declared void the benefits that result from the cancellation of the act shall benefit all the
creditors to whose prejudice the act was made.

Article 241

When a person acquires a right from an insolvent debtor but has not paid the price, he may escape the
consequence of an action by a creditor, provided that the price corresponds to the normal price and he deposits
this price in the court's treasury.

Article 242
1. Fraud which consists solely of giving a creditor an unjustified preference over another creditor only
entails the loss of that advantage by the creditor who was given the unjustified preference.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 36
2. If an insolvent debtor pays off one of his creditors before the date originally fixed for payment, the
payment is not valid as against the other creditors, neither is a payment, made after the date fixed for
payment, valid as against the other creditors if made as a result of a fraudulent arrangement between the
debtor and the creditor so paid off.

Article 243

An action to set aside an act of alienation is prescribed after three years from the date on which the creditor has
knowledge of the grounds for such an action. It is prescribed in any case after fifteen years from the date on
which the contested alienation was effected.

Article 244
1. If a simulated contract has been drawn up, creditors of the contracting parties and particular successors in
title, may, if they are in good faith, avail themselves of the hidden contract and establish, by any means,
the simulation of the contract by which they were prejudiced.
2. In the case of a conflict of interest between interested parties, some of whom rely upon the ostensible
contract and others on the hidden contract, the former shall have preference.

Article 245

When the contracting parties hide a genuine contract behind an ostensible contract, the genuine contract will
bind the contracting parties and their universal successors in title.

2. One of the Means of Security: the Right of Retention

Article 246
1. A person who is under an obligation to supply something, may refrain from performing his obligation so
long as his creditor does not offer to perform an obligation incumbent on him arising out of the obligation
of the debtor and connected therewith, or as long as the creditor does not supply adequate security to
guarantee the performance of his obligation.
2. This right belongs especially to the possessor or holder of a thing, if he has incurred expenditure of a
necessary or useful kind on the thing. The possessor or holder may, in such a case, refuse to return the
thing until he has been repaid the amount due to him, unless the obligation of restitution results from an
unlawful act.

Article 247
1. A mere right of retention does not imply a concession upon the thing.
2. A person who retains the thing must preserve the thing in accordance with the rules as to pledge and must
render an account of the fruits.
3. If the thing retained is of a perishable nature or susceptible of deterioration, the person who retains the
thing may obtain from the court authority for its sale in accordance with the provisions stipulated in
Article (119). The right of retention will then be transferred to the price thereof.

Article 248
1. The right of retention is extinguished by the fact of the thing ceasing to be in the hands of the possessor or
the holder.
2. A person retaining the thing, who has lost possession thereof without his knowledge or in spite of his
opposition, may claim restitution of the thing, if he makes his claim within a period of thirty days from the
time he became aware of the loss of possession, provided that one year has not elapsed since the date of
loss.

3. Insolvency

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 37
Article 249

A debtor may be declared insolvent, if his assets are insufficient to pay his due debts.

Article 250

Insolvency is declared by judgment delivered by the Court of First Instance of the district in which the domicile
of the debtor is situated, upon the petition of the debtor himself or of one of his creditors. The case will be heard
as one of urgency.

Article 251

The court shall, in every case, before declaring the debtor insolvent, take into consideration all the
circumstances surrounding the debtor, whether such circumstances are of a general or of a special nature. The
court will thus take into account the debtor's future resources, his personal ability and his responsibility for the
causes that have given rise to his insolvency, the legitimate interests of his creditors and any other
circumstances likely to influence his financial situation.

Article 252

The extension of timeframe for opposition to judgments rendered in cases of insolvency is eight days and for
lodging appeal fifteen days from the date of the service of these judgments.

Article 253
1. The clerk of the court shall, on the day on which the suit for the declaration of insolvency is filed for
registration, register the writ introducing the action, in a special register of the names of persons who are
insolvent. The clerk shall also record in the margin of such registration the judgment delivered in the case
and any judgment confirming or setting aside such judgment; this registration and these entries must be
made on the date the judgment is entered.
2. The clerk shall, in addition, send to the court registry a copy of such registrations and marginal entries for
the purpose of their being recorded in a general register; the regulations as to this general register shall be
laid down through a decision to be issued by the Minister of Justice.

Article 254

The debtor shall, if he changes his domicile, notify the clerk of the court of the district in which he formerly
resided of the change. The clerk shall, as soon as he has knowledge of such change of domicile, either by
notification by the debtor or in any other way, send at the cost of the debtor a copy of the judgment declaring
the insolvency, and of the marginal entries, to the court in the district in which the new domicile of the debtor is
situated, for the purpose of registration in the registers of such court.

Article 255
1. A judgment declaring insolvency renders all debts not yet due by the debtor payable immediately. The
agreed or legal interest for the period barred by barring of the due date shall be deducted from these debts.
2. The judge may, however, on the petition of the debtor, and in the presence of the interested creditors,
maintain or prolong the time fixed for payment of debts not yet due, he may also allow the debtor a delay
in respect of debts that have fallen due, if he considers that the circumstances justify such measure and
that such a measure is the best way to protect the joint interests of the debtor and the creditors.

Article 256
1. A declaration of insolvency is no bar to individual proceedings by creditors against the debtor.
2. Any charge registered on the real property of the debtor after registration of the declaration of insolvency
shall nevertheless be invalid as against creditors who had rights prior to the registration of the petition
instituting the insolvency proceedings.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 38
Article 257

The registration of the writ for the declaration of insolvency will render void as against the creditors any act
entered into by the debtor after the date of such registration involving the diminution of his assets or the
increase of his liabilities, just as the registration renders void as against his creditors any payment of debt made
by the debtor after the date of the registration of the writ.

Article 258
1. A debtor may dispose of his property, even without the consent of his creditors, provided that he does so
at its normal price and that this price is deposited by the purchaser at the court's treasury for division in
accordance with the procedures for distribution.
2. If the price is less than the normal price, the alienation will be void as against creditors, unless the
purchaser deposits, in addition to the purchase price, a sum representing the difference between the
purchase price and the normal price.

Article 259

If creditors attach the revenues of a debtor, the President of the Court competent to render the declaration of
insolvency may, upon application by the debtor, make him an alimentary allowance to be taken out of the
revenues attached. An order issued on such application will be subject to opposition within three days from the
date on which it is rendered, in the case of opposition by the debtor, and from the date of its notification to the
creditors in the case of an opposition by the creditors.

Article 260

A debtor shall be liable to the penalties for misappropriation in the following two cases:
a. If, when proceedings for payment of a debt have been taken against him, he willfully renders himself
insolvent in fraud of the rights of his creditors and a judgment is delivered condemning him to pay the
debt and declaring him to be in a state of insolvency.
b. If, after the judgment declaring his insolvency, the debtor has, in fraud of the rights of his creditors, kept
back from his creditors part of his property to avoid execution thereon or has falsely represented debts,
which debts are fictitious or exaggerated.

Article 261
1. A state of insolvency ceases by virtue of a judgment of the Court of First Instance in the district in which
the domicile of the debtor is situated, delivered upon application of any interested party in the two
following cases:
a. If it is established that the liabilities of the debtor are no longer in excess of his assets.
b. If the debtor effects payment of the debts that were due by him as apart from those that became due
as a result of the declaration of insolvency. In such a case, debts that became due as a result of the
insolvency become, in accordance with Article (263), once again payable on the dates upon which
they were due before the declaration of insolvency.
2. It is the duty of the clerk of the court to record the judgment that puts an end to the state of insolvency in
the margin of the registration provided for in Article (253). This entry shall be made on the day that the
judgment is delivered and the clerk shall send a copy of this judgment to the registry of Egypt Court for
the purpose of making a similar entry.

Article 262

A state of insolvency automatically ceases upon the expiration of five years from the date on which the
registration of the judgment declaring the insolvency was issued.

Article 263

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 39
A debtor may, after the cessation of the insolvency, claim that debts that became due as a result of the
insolvency, and which have not been paid, shall once again become payable on the dates on which they were
due for payment before the insolvency upon condition that he has paid all debts that have fallen due except
those falling due as a result of the insolvency.

Article 264

The termination of a state of insolvency by judgment or by the force of the law does not prevent creditors from
challenging the acts of their debtor or exercising the rights of the debtor in accordance with Articles (235)
through (243) inclusive.

Chapter 3 Characteristics Modifying the Effects of Obligation

Section 1 Condition and Maturity

1: Condition

Article 265

An obligation shall be conditional when its existence or its abatement depends on a future and uncertain event.

Article 266

(1) An obligation is not enforceable when the condition upon which it depends is impossible or involves
violation of morality or to public order; in case the condition is precedent. If the condition is subsequent, the
condition itself is deemed to be non-existent.

(2) An obligation depending upon a subsequent condition involving violation of morality or public order is,
however, void if the condition was the determining factor for undertaking the obligation.

Article 267

An obligation is void when it is subject to a condition precedent by which the existence of the obligation
depends solely on the will of the person who undertook the obligation.

Article 268

When an obligation depends on a condition precedent, it does not become enforceable until the condition is
fulfilled. Before the condition is fulfilled, such obligation is not subject to compulsory or to voluntary
performance. A creditor may, however, take protective measures to safeguard his rights.

Article 269

(1) An obligation is extinguished when the condition subsequent is fulfilled. The creditor must restitute that
which he has received: if restitution is impossible by reason of a cause for which he is responsible, he must pay
a compensation.

(2) Acts of management carried out by a creditor shall remain enforceable notwithstanding the fulfillment of the
condition.

Article 270

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 40
(1) The fulfillment of a condition is effective retroactively to the day on which the obligation was contracted
unless it appears from the will of the parties or by reason of the nature of the contract that the existence of the
obligation or its extinction should take effect from the moment of the fulfillment of the condition.

(2) In any case, the condition will not have retroactive effect if the execution of the obligation becomes
impossible before the fulfillment of the condition, on account of force majeure in which the debtor played no
part.

2: Maturity

Article 271
1. An obligation is for a fixed term if its performance or extinction depends on a future certain event.
2. An event is considered to be certain if it must happen of necessity even if the time at which it should
happen is unknown.

Article 272

If it is inferred from the obligation that the debtor shall only perform the obligation when he is able to do so or
when he has the means to do so, the judge will fix a reasonable time for the term, taking into account the actual
and future resources of the debtor and allowing for the diligence of a man anxious to perform his obligation.

Article 273

A debtor's right to stick to maturity date shall abate:

a. If he is declared bankrupt or insolvent in accordance with the provisions of law.
b. If he has, by his own act, appreciably diminished the special security given to the creditor, even if this
security was given by a subsequent act or by virtue of the law, unless the creditor prefers to demand
additional security. If the reduction of the security is due to a cause for which the debtor is not
responsible, he will forfeit his rights to the term unless he provides adequate security.
c. If he does not supply the creditor with the securities promised in the contract.

Article 274
1. An obligation with a precedent term only becomes due on the date of the expiration of the term. The
creditor may, however, even before the end of the term, take measures to protect his rights and may, in
particular, ask for security if he fears that the debtor may become bankrupt or insolvent, and has
reasonable grounds for his fears.
2. At the end of a subsequent term, the obligation is extinguished without such extinction having any
retroactive effect.

Section 2 Multiple Objects of an Obligation

1: Facultative Obligation

Article 275

An obligation is facultative when its object includes multiple things and the debtor is entirely freed by the
performance of one of them. The option, in the absence of any special provision in the law or of an agreement
by the parties to the contrary, belongs to the debtor.

Article 276

(1) If the option is entitled to the debtor and he fails to elect, or if there are a number of debtors who do not

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 41
agree amongst themselves, the creditor may apply to the judge to fix a term for the debtor to elect or for the
several debtors to agree amongst themselves, failing which the judge will himself fix the object of the
obligation.

(2) If the option is entitled to the creditor and he fails to elect, or if there are a number of creditors who do not
agree amongst themselves, the judge, if required by the debtor, will fix a term at the expiration of which the
option will pass to the debtor.

Article 277

If the option is entitled to the debtor and not one of the several things included in the object of the obligation can
be performed, he shall be bound to pay the value of the last of the thing that became impossible to perform if he
is responsible for the impossibility of performance even as regards one only of the thing.

2: Alternative Obligation

Article 278

(1) An obligation is alternative when its object consists of one thing only but the debtor may free himself of the
obligation by the performance of another thing in its place.

(2) The object of the obligation is the thing promised and not that thing the performance of which frees the
debtor. It is this object which determines the nature of the obligation.

Section 3 Multiple Parties to an Obligation

1. joint Liability

Article 279

Joint liability between creditors or between debtors is not presumed; rather, it is established by agreement or by
law.

Article 280
1. When there is solidarity between creditors, the debtor may pay the debt to anyone of them unless one of
them objects to such payment.
2. Solidarity does not prevent the debt being divided between the heirs of one of the co-creditors unless the
debt itself is indivisible.

Article 281
1. Co-creditors may take proceedings jointly or severally against the debtor for the performance of the
obligation. In so doing, the conditions modifying the effect of the obligation as between each creditor and
the debtor should be taken into account.
2. A debtor cannot, if he is sued for payment by one of his co-creditors, set up as a defense against that
creditor, defenses that are personal as regards the other creditors, but he may set up defenses which are
personal to the creditor suing him and those which are common to all the creditors.

Article 282
1. If a debtor is released of his debt vis-a-vis one of his co-creditors for a reason other than performance, he
shall be released as regards the other creditors only up to the amount of the share of the creditor to whom
he is no longer liable.
2. No one of the co-creditors may act in such a way as to prejudice the rights of the other creditors.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 42
Article 283
1. That which a co-creditors receives on account of the debt reverts to all the creditors and will be divided
between them proportionally.
2. The division shall be made in equal parts if there is no agreement or provision of the law to the contrary.

Article 284

When there is joint liability between the debtors, payment effected by one of them liberates all the others.

Article 285
1. A creditor may take action against all his co-debtors jointly or severally. In so doing, the conditions
modifying the effect of the obligations as between the creditor and each of the co-debtors should be taken
into account.
2. A co-debtor who is sued by a creditor for performance cannot set up against that creditor defenses that are
personal to other co-debtors, but he may set up defenses that are personal to himself as well as those
common to all the co-debtors.

Article 286

Novation of a debt between the creditor and one of the co-debtors releases other co-debtors unless the creditor
has reserved his rights against them.

Article 287

A co-debtor cannot set up compensation with regard to that which a creditor owes to one of the other
co-debtors, except in respect of the share of such co-debtor.

Article 288

Merger that occurs in the person of a creditor and of one of the co-debtors does not extinguish the debt as
regards the other co-debtors except to the extent of the merged share of the co-debtor.

Article 289
1. A release of debt granted by the creditor to one of the co-debtors does not release the other co-debtors
unless the creditor expressly declares such to be the case.
2. In the absence of such a declaration, the creditor may only claim from the other co-debtors the balance of
the debt after deduction of the share of the co-debtor whom he has released, unless he has reserved his
rights against them for the whole of the debt. In such a case, the co-debtors have a claim against the
co-debtor who has been released for his share in the debt.

Article 290

If a creditor releases one of the co-debtors from the joint liability, his right to claim the whole of the debt from
the other co-debtors remains unless otherwise agreed.

Article 291
1. In all cases of the release of one of the co-debtors either from the debt or from the joint liability, the other
co-debtors may in accordance with Article (298) claim from the co-debtor who has been released his
contribution in the share of those co-debtors who are insolvent.
2. If, however, the creditor has discharged the co-debtor to whom he has given a release from all liability in
respect of the debt, the creditor will bear himself the contribution of such a co-debtor in the share of the
insolvent co-debtor.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 43
Article 292
1. If the debt is extinguished by prescription as regards one of the co-debtors the other co-debtors will only
benefit from this prescription to the extent of the contribution of that co-debtor.
2. If the prescription is interrupted or suspended as regards one of the co-debtors, the creditor cannot claim
interruption or suspension as regards the other co-debtors.

Article 293
1. In the performance of an obligation a co-debtor is only responsible for his own acts.
2. A formal demand to one of the co-debtors or proceedings taken against one of them by the creditor will
have no effect against the other co-debtors, but if one of the co-debtors issues a formal demand against the
creditor, this demand will benefit the other co-debtors.

Article 294

A transaction entered into between a creditor and one of the co-debtors will benefit the other co-debtors if it
involves remission of the debt or the release of the liability in respect thereof in any other way. If such a
transaction creates an obligation or increases the existing obligation, it will only be binding upon the other
co-debtors if they consent thereto.

Article 295
1. An acknowledgement of debt by one of the co-debtors does not bind the other co-debtors.
2. If one of the co-debtors refuses to take an oath or if he tenders the oath to the creditor and the creditor
takes the oath, the oath refused or tendered will not prejudice the other co-debtors.
3. If the creditor tenders the oath to one of the co-debtors and this co-debtor takes the oath, the oath will
profit the other co-debtors.

Article 296
1. A judgment given against one of the co-debtors will have no effect against the other co-debtors.
2. If the judgment is given in favor of one of them, it will benefit the others, unless the judgment is based on
a ground relating only to the co-debtor in favor of whom the judgment is rendered.

Article 297
1. If one of the co-debtor pays the debt in full, he will only have a claim against each of the other co-debtors
for each of such co-debtors' own share respectively, even if he exercises the right to action of the creditor
by way of subrogation.
2. The amount paid is divisible between the co-debtors in equal parts in the absence of an agreement or a
provision of the law to the contrary.

Article 298

If one of the co-debtors becomes insolvent, his share shall be borne by the co-debtor who has effected payment
and by all the other solvent co-debtors pro rata.

Article 299

When the debt concerns one only of the co-debtors, he will be liable for the whole debt to the other co-debtors.

2. Indivisibility

Article 300

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 44
An obligation is indivisible:
a. When it has for its object something which by its nature is not susceptible of division.
b. If it is the intention of the parties or it follows from the purpose pursued by the parties that the
performance of the obligation should not be divided.

Article 301
1. When there are several debtors in respect of an indivisible obligation, each debtor is liable for the debt in
full.
2. A debtor who has effected payment will have a remedy against each of the other co-debtors for his part,
unless the contrary appears from the circumstances.

Article 302
1. When there are several creditors in respect of an indivisible obligation or several heirs of a creditor in
respect of such an obligation each of the creditors or heirs may demand the performance in its entirety of
the indivisible obligation. If one of the creditors or the heirs contests such a demand, the debtor shall
effect payment to all the creditors together or deposit the object of the obligation in court.
2. Co-creditors will have remedies against a creditor who has received payment, each one for his share.

Chapter 4 Transfer of an Obligation

Section 1 Assignment of Right

Article 303

A creditor may assign his right to a third party, provided that his claim is not impossible of assignment by
reason of a provision of the law, of an agreement between the parties or on account of its nature. The
assignment is valid without the consent of the debtor.

Article 304

A right can only be assigned to the extent to which it can be attached.

Article 305

An assignment is not effective as against a debtor or a third party unless it has been accepted by the debtor or
notified to him. The acceptance by the debtor does not render the assignment valid as against third parties unless
it has an established date.

Article 306

The creditor to whom the assignment is made may, prior to notification of the assignment or to its acceptance,
take all precautionary measures to safeguard the right that has been transferred to him.

Article 307

The assignment of a right comprises its warranties such as securities, concessions and mortgages, as well as
interest and installments that have fallen due.

Article 308
1. In the case of an assignment for valuable consideration, the assignor, in the absence of an agreement to the
contrary, only warrants the existence of the right assigned at the moment of the assignment.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 45
2. When, however, the assignment is not for valuable consideration, the assignor does not even warrant the
existence of the right.

Article 309
1. An assignor does not warrant the solvency of the debtor unless such warranty is specifically stipulated.
2. If an assignor has warranted the solvency of the debtor, this warranty only applies, in the absence of
agreement to the contrary, to the solvency of the debtor at the time of the assignment.

Article 310

When an assignee exercises his right of recourse in warranty against the assignor, in accordance with the two
preceding articles, the assignor is only liable to restitute that which he has received together with interest and
expenses notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary.

Article 311

An assignor is responsible for his personal acts, even if the assignment is not for valuable consideration or even
if it has been stipulated to be without warranty.

Article 312

A debtor of the right assigned may raise, as against the assignee, the defenses that he was entitled to raise
against the assignor at the moment that the assignment became effective against him. He may also raise
defenses arising from the contract of assignment.

Article 313

In the event of several assignments relating to the same right, preference is given to the assignment that is first
effective as regards third parties.

Article 314
1. When an attachment is served upon the debtor of the debt assigned, before the assignment has become
effective as against third parties, the assignment is equivalent to an attachment vis-a-vis the distrainer.
2. In this case, if another attachment is made after the assignment becomes effective as against third parties,
the debt will be divided pro rata between the first distrainer, the assignee and the second distrainer, but the
amount necessary to make up the amount of the sum assigned will be deducted from the share of the
second distrainer and paid to the assignee.

Section 2 Assignment of Debt

Article 315

An assignment of debt is affected by an agreement between the debtor and a third party who undertakes to
assume the debt in the place of the debtor.

Article 316
1. An assignment of debt is not effective as against the creditor unless ratified by the creditor.
2. When the person assuming the debt or the original debtor notifies the assignment to the creditor, and gives
him a reasonable period of time to ratify the assignment, the assignment will be deemed to have been
refused if the creditor does not give his consent before the expiration of such period.

Article 317

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 46
1. Until the creditor has signified his ratification or refusal of the assignment, the person assuming the debt
will, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, be responsible to the original debtor, to effect
payment on due date to the creditor. This rule applies even when the creditor has refused the assignment.
2. The original debtor cannot, however, call upon the person assuming the debt to make payment to the
creditor so long as he has not himself discharged his obligation to the person assuming the debt in
accordance with the contract of assignment.

Article 318

(1) The debt assigned is transmitted with all its warranties.

(2) The surety, whether real or personal, does not remain bound to the creditor unless he has agreed to the
assignment.

Article 319

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the original debtor warrants the solvency of the person assuming
the debt at the moment the creditor ratifies the assignment.

Article 320

A person assuming the debt may raise against the creditor the defenses which the original debtor was entitled to
raise. He may also raise the defenses arising out of the contract of assignment.

Article 321

(1) An assignment of debt may also take place between the creditor and the person assuming the debt by an
agreement that provides that such person replaces the original debtor in his obligation.

(2) In such a case, the provisions of Articles (318) and (320) will be applicable.

Article 322

(1) The sale of a legally mortgaged immovable property does not imply the transfer of the mortgage debt to the
purchaser unless the agreement provides for such a transfer.

(2) If the Seller and purchaser agree to assign the debt and if the deed of sale is transcribed, the creditor should,
after notification to him by legal process of the assignment, ratify or refuse the assignment, within a period not
exceeding six months. If he maintains silence up to the end of this period, such silence is equivalent to
ratification.

Chapter 5 Extinguishment of Obligation

Section 1 Performance

1. The parties to Performance

Article 323

(1) Performance may be made by the debtor, his representative or by any other interested party, subject to the
provisions of Article (208).

(2) Performance may also, subject to the provisions of Article 208, be made by a third party who is not
interested in such payment, even without the knowledge or against the wish of the debtor, but the creditor may

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 47
refuse performance tendered by a third party if it is opposed by the debtor and the debtor has informed the
creditor of his opposition.

Article 324

(1) If a third party performs the debt, such third party shall have a remedy against the debtor up to the amount
that he has paid.

(2) The debtor, against whose wish payment has been made, may contest the claim made against him by the
person who has made the payment on his behalf as regards all or part of the payment made, if he shows that he
had any interest whatsoever in opposing the payment.

Article 325

(1) Payment is only valid if the person who made the payment is the owner of that with which he has paid the
obligation and has the capacity of disposing of it.

(2) When payment of that which is due is made by a person without the necessary legal competence to dispose
of the thing with which payment is effected, it extinguishes the obligation provided that it does not prejudice the
person who has paid.

Article 326

When payment is made by a third party, such third party is subrogated in the rights of the creditor who is paid
off in the following cases:
a. When such third party was liable for the debt jointly with the debtor or was under an obligation to pay the
debt on his behalf.
b. When such third party, being himself a creditor, even an unsecured creditor, had paid another creditor
ranking before him by reason of a real security.
c. When, having acquired an immovable, he has paid the price to creditors having a real security upon the
immovable in question.
d. When the law expressly gives him the right of subrogation.

Article 327

A creditor who receives what is due to him from a third party may, by agreement with the third party, subrogate
such third party into his rights even if the debtor does not agree to the subrogation. The agreement must not be
concluded after the time of payment.

Article 328

A debtor may also, when he has borrowed a sum with which he has paid the debt, subrogate the lender into the
rights of the creditor who received the payment, even without the consent of the creditor, provided that in the
contract of loan, it is stated that the sum in question was borrowed for the purpose of effecting the payment, and
that in the receipt in discharge, it is stated that the payment was made with the money lent by the new creditor.

Article 329

A third party subrogated in law or by agreement in the rights of the creditor, is substituted for the creditor as
regards the debt to the amount of the sums that he has himself paid with all the attributes of the debt and all
accessories, securities, and defenses attached to the debt.

Article 330

(1) In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, when a third party pays part of a debt to a creditor and is

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 48
subrogated into the rights of the creditor as regards such part, the creditor shall not be prejudiced by such partial
payment and may exercise his rights for that which remains due, in preference to the third party.

(2) When a further third party is subrogated in the rights of the creditor, as regards that which remains due to
this creditor, this further third party so subrogated, together with the third party subrogated before him, will
have a right to claim what is due to each of them pro rata.

Article 331

A third party holder of a mortgaged property who has paid all the mortgage debt and has been subrogated into
the rights of the creditors, shall only have the right, by reason of such subrogation, to claim from the holder of
another property mortgaged for the same debt the share of that holder in the debt proportional to the value of the
immovable held by him.

Article 332

Payment shall be made to the creditor or to his representative. A person who produces to the debtor a receipt in
discharge issued by the creditor is deemed to be qualified to receive payment unless it has been agreed that
payment shall be made to the creditor in person.

Article 333

Payment to someone other than the creditor or his representative does not free the debtor or his obligation unless
the payment is ratified by the creditor, or profits the creditor and then only to the extent of such profit, or unless
the payment was made in good faith to a person holding the title to the debt.

Article 334

When a creditor refuses, without good reason, to accept payment that is regularly offered to him, or to do such
things without which payment cannot be made, or declares that he will not accept payment, he will be deemed
to have been duly summoned to accept payment from the time that such refusal is recorded by a summons
notified to him by legal process.

Article 335

From the time that a summons has been served on a creditor he shall be responsible for the loss or the
deterioration of the thing and interest on the debt ceases to run; the debtor shall then have the right to place the
thing in safe keeping at the cost of the creditor and claim compensation for any damage he may have suffered.

Article 336

When the subject matter of the payment is a definite and specific thing which must be delivered at the place
where it is situated, the debtor may, after having summoned the creditor to take delivery, obtain an order of the
court to place it in safe keeping. If the thing in question is an immovable or a thing intended to remain in place,
the debtor may ask for it to be placed under Custodianship.

Article 337

(1) The debtor may, by permission of the judge, sell, by public auction, things of a rapidly perishing nature or
movables that necessitate an exorbitant expenditure for safekeeping or custody, and deposit the price in the
"Court's treasury".

(2) When the thing has a known price on the market or is quoted on the stock exchange, it may only be sold by
public auction if it is impossible to sell it by agreement at the market or quoted price.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 49
Article 338

Deposit or any other equivalent measure is also permissible if the debtor does not know the person or the
domicile of the creditor, or if the creditor, being totally or partially incapable, has not a representative to accept
payment on his behalf, or the debt is the object of a dispute between several persons, or if there are other serious
reasons which justify this measure.

Article 339

The actual tender of the thing due is equivalent to payment, in so far as the debtor is concerned, when it is
followed by a deposit made in the manner prescribed in the Code of Procedure, or by any other equivalent
measure, provided that it is accepted by the creditor or recognized as valid by a final judgment.

Article 340

(1) A debtor who has made a tender of the debt followed by a deposit, or by an equivalent measure, may retract
his tender so long as it has not been accepted by the creditor, or so long as it has not been recognized as valid by
a final judgment, in which case the co-debtor and sureties will not be freed.

(2) If a debtor retracts his tender after its acceptance by the creditor or after it has been declared valid by a
judgment, and his withdrawal is accepted by the creditor, the creditor shall no longer have the right, to avail
himself of the securities guaranteeing his right, and the co-debtors and the sureties shall in such case be
released.

2. Object of Performance

Article 341

Payment must be made with the very thing due. The creditor cannot be forced to accept anything else, even if
the value of such other thing is equal or greater.

Article 342

(1) In the absence of an agreement or a legal provision to the contrary, the debtor cannot force his creditor to
accept a partial payment of his debt.

(2) If, in a case where part of the debt is contested, a creditor agrees to receive payment of that part of his claim
which is admitted, the debtor cannot refuse to pay the part that is admitted.

Article 343

When a debtor is under an obligation to pay expenses and interest in addition to the principal of the debt, and
makes a payment which does not cover the principal and these accessories, the payment shall, unless otherwise
agreed, be imputed, in the first instance, to expenses, then to interest and lastly to principal.

Article 344

If a debtor owes the same creditor several debts of the same kind and if the payment made by him does not
suffice to cover all the debts, he has the right to indicate, when effecting payment, the debt which he intends to
discharge, provided that he is not prevented from so doing by law or by agreement.

Article 345

Failing any indication by the debtor as provided for in the preceding article, the payment shall be imputed to the

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 50
debt that has fallen due: in a case where several debts have fallen due, to the most onerous debt, in a case where
the debts are all equally onerous, to the debt indicated by the creditor.

Article 346

(1) In the absence of an agreement or of a provision of the law to the contrary, payment must be made as soon
as the obligation has been definitely created as a liability of the debtor.

(2) The judge may in exceptional cases and in the absence of a provision of the law to the contrary, grant to the
debtor, when his position so requires, one or more reasonable delays for the performance of his obligation,
provided that no serious prejudice is thereby caused to the creditor.

Article 347

(1) In the absence of an agreement or of a provision of the law to the contrary, when the subject matter of the
obligation is a definite and ascertained thing, it should be delivered at the place it was situated at the time the
obligation was created.

(2) In the case of other obligations, payment is due at the debtor's domicile at the time of payment or at his place
of business if the obligation is connected with such business.

Article 348

In the absence of an agreement or a provision of the law to the contrary, expenses in connection with payment
are at the charge of the debtor.

Article 349

(1) A person who pays part of a debt has the right to demand a receipt for the amount he has paid and a note
showing the payment on the document of title of the debt. He has also the right, at the time the debt is paid in
full, to demand the restitution or cancellation of the document of title. If this document has been lost, the debtor
may demand a written declaration from the creditor that the document of title has been lost.

(2) If the creditor refuses to comply with the conditions laid down in the preceding paragraph, the debtor may
place the object due in Custodianship.

Section 2 Extinguishment of obligation by means other than Performance

1. Performance by Payment

Article 350

When a creditor accepts in settlement of his right another thing in place of that which is due, this performance
by payment takes the place of payment.

Article 351

The provisions of the law relating to sale, especially those which relate to the legal competence of the parties,
warranty against eviction and hidden defects, apply to "performance by payment" in cases where it transfers the
ownership of the thing given in place of the thing due. The provisions of the law relating to payment, especially
those which relate to the imputation of sums paid and to the extinction of warranties, are also applicable in so
far as the "performance by payment" extinguishes the debt.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 51
2. Novation and Delegation

Article 352

An obligation shall be novated:

1. By a change of the debt, when the two parties agree to substitute a new obligation for the original
obligation, which new obligation differs from the original obligation as regards its object or as regards its
source.
2. By a change of the debtor, when a creditor and a third party agree that such third party shall take the place
of the original debtor and that the original debtor shall be released of the debt without his consent being
necessary, or when the debtor has procured the consent of the creditor to substitute the debtor by a third
party who consents to be the new debtor.
3. By a change of the creditor, when the creditor, the debtor and a third party agree that this third party shall
be the new creditor.

Article 353
1. Novation can be effected only if the two obligations, the original and the new obligation, are free from
any grounds of nullity.
2. If the original obligation results from a voidable contract, the novation is only valid if the new obligation
has been assumed both with a view to confirming the contract and to replacing the original obligation.

Article 354
1. Novation is not presumed; it must be expressly agreed or result clearly from the circumstances.
2. In particular, novation does not result, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, from the
subscription of a promissory note in respect of a pre-existing debt, from changes that relate only to the
date, place or mode of performance of the thing, or from modifications made to the obligation only as
regards securities or as to the rate of interest.

Article 355
1. The mere entry of the debt in current account does not effect novation.
2. There is, however, novation when the balance of a current account has been fixed and agreed; if, however,
the debt was guaranteed by means of a special security, that security is maintained unless otherwise
agreed.

Article 356
1. Novation has the effect of extinguishing the original obligation with its accessories and of substituting for
it a new obligation.
2. Securities which guaranteed the performance of the original obligation, are not transferred to the new
obligation, unless the law provides otherwise, or unless it appears from the agreement or the
circumstances of the case that such is the intention of the parties.

Article 357
1. If the debtor has given real securities in guarantee of the original obligation, the following conditions will
be observed in the agreement providing for the transfer of these securities to the new obligation:
a. When the novation results from a change of the debt, the creditor and the debtor may agree that the
securities shall be transferred to the new obligation, to the extent that such a transfer does not cause
prejudice to third parties.
b. When the novation results from a change of the debtor, the creditor and the new debtor may agree,
without the consent of the original debtor, that the real securities shall be maintained.
c. When the novation results from a change of the creditor, the three contracting parties may agree that
the securities shall be maintained.
2. The agreement providing for the transfer of the real securities cannot be set up against third parties, unless
it is made at the same time as the novation, and the provisions as to registration of real rights are complied
with.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 52
Article 358

Real and personal as well as joint surety is only transferred to the new obligation with the consent of the sureties
and of the co-debtors.

Article 359
1. There is delegation when a debtor procures the acceptance by his creditor of a third party who undertakes
to pay in his stead.
2. Delegation does not necessarily infer the existence of a previous debt between the debtor and such third
party.

Article 360
1. When, in a case of delegation, the contracting parties agree to substitute a new obligation for the original
obligation, such a delegation constitutes a novation by the change of the debtor. It results in the liberation
of the original debtor from the obligation to his creditor, provided that the new obligation assumed by the
new debtor is valid and that such new debtor is not insolvent at the time of the delegation.
2. Novation is not assumed in a case of delegation; in the absence of an agreement providing for novation,
the original obligation continues concurrently with the new obligation.

Article 361

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the obligation of the new debtor towards the creditor is valid
even if his obligation towards the original debtor is void or liable to be contested, subject to the new debtor's
right of recourse against the original debtor.

3. Setoff/ Clearing

Article 362
1. A debtor has a right to setoff of that which he owes to his creditor against that which such creditor owes
him, even when the causes giving rise to the two debts are different, provided that they are both for a sum
of money or fungibles of a like nature and quality, that they are not in dispute and that they are due and
may be sued for.
2. Postponement of payment by reason of a delay granted by the Judge or by the creditor does not prevent
setoff.

Article 363

A debtor may avail himself of the setoff even when the places of payment of the two debts are different, but he
must, in such a case, make good any loss caused to the creditor by reason of the fact that the creditor was not
able, as a result of the compensation, to obtain or to perform the thing at the place fixed for this purpose.

Article 364

Setoff takes place, whatever may be the sources of debts, except in the following cases:
a. Where one of the two debts consists of a thing of which the owner has been unjustly deprived, and is the
object of a claim for restitution.
b. Where one of the two debts consists of a thing that has been deposited or lent for use and is the object of a
claim for restitution.
c. Where one of the two debts is a right which is not liable to attachment.

Article 365
1. Setoff only takes place when set up by the interested party. Compensation cannot be renounced before the

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 53
 right thereto has come into existence.
2. Setoff extinguishes the two debts to the extent of the amount of the smaller debt, from the moment they
become subject to setoff. Imputation of the amount discharged in compensation takes place in the same
way as in ordinary payment.

Article 366

If the delay for prescription of a debt has expired when setoff is set up, setoff will nevertheless still take place if
the delay for prescription has not expired when setoff became possible.

Article 367
1. Setoff may not take place to the detriment of rights acquired by third parties.
2. If, after the seizure by a third party of the property held by the debtor for his creditor, such debtor
becomes the creditor of his creditor, he cannot set up setoff to the prejudice of the attaching creditor.

Article 368
1. When a creditor has assigned his debt to a third party, the debtor who has consented to the assignment
without reserve, cannot establish setoff against the assignee, which he had the right to set up before he
consented to the assignment; he can only enforce his claim against the assignor.
2. But a debtor who has not accepted an assignment which has been notified to him, may, notwithstanding
the assignment, set up compensation.

Article 369

A debtor who had the right to set up compensation but who nevertheless paid his debt, cannot avail himself, to
the prejudice of third parties, of the securities guaranteeing his right unless he did not know of the existence of
his right.

4. Merger

Article 370
1. When the capacity of a creditor and a debtor in the same debt are united in the same person, the debt is
extinguished to the extent of the merger.
2. When the cause which gave rise to the merger disappears and its disappearance is retroactive, the debt
revives with its accessories as regards all interested parties, and the merger is deemed never to have
existed.

Chapter 3 Extinguishment of Obligation without Performance

Section 1 Discharge

Article 371

Obligations are extinguished by a voluntary release of a debtor by his creditor. The release is completed as soon
as it comes to the knowledge of the debtor, but becomes void if refused by him.

Article 372
1. The substantive provisions relating to gifts shall apply to discharges.
2. No particular form is required for a discharge but if it applies to a disposition it must satisfy the form laid
down by law or agreed by the contracting parties.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 54
Section 2 Impossible Performance

Article 373

The obligation shall be extinguished if the debtor proves that the performance of it has become impossible for
him for force majeure in which he played no part.

Section 3 Extinctive Prescription

Article 374

The term of prescription for obligations is fifteen years with the exception of those cases for which a special
provision is contained in the law and with the exception also of the following cases.

Article 375
1. The term of prescription for a periodical renewing right such as the rent of buildings and of agricultural
land, the rent of premises, interest, periodical payments, salaries, wages and pensions, is five years.
2. The term of prescription for revenue due by a holder in bad faith and for revenue due by a nazir of a waqf
(grantor of endowment) to the beneficiaries is fifteen years.

Article 376

The term of prescription for the rights of physicians, chemists, lawyers, engineers, experts, receivers in
bankruptcy, brokers, professors or teachers is five years, provided that the debts are due as remuneration for
work coming within the scope of their professions or in payment of expenses incurred by them.

Article 377

Final text of the Article dated: 17/06/2011

1. The Statute of Limitations for taxes and fees to the State or any public legal person shall be three years,
unless the law stipulates a longer term. The Statute of Limitations for annual taxes and fees shall
commence on the end of the year for which they became due and, for the fees on legal documents, on the
date on which the closing arguments of the action in respect of which such documents were drawn up are
completed, or on the date of drawing up such documents if no hearing takes place.
2. The Statute of Limitations of the right to claim the refund of unduly paid taxes and fees shall be five years
starting from the date of payment thereof.
3. The preceding provisions shall not prejudice the provisions of special laws.

Article 378
1. The term of prescription is one year for the following rights:
a. The rights of merchants and manufacturers in respect of things supplied to persons who do not trade
in these articles, as well as the rights of action of hotel and restaurant proprietors for the cost of
accommodation and food and for expenses incurred by them on behalf of their clients.
b. The rights of workmen, servants, wage earners, in respect of their pay, daily or otherwise, and for
the cost of supplies provided by them.
2. When a person claims this prescription of one year, he must take oath that he has actually paid the debt.
The judge will of his own accord pass the oath. If the debtor is dead, such oath will be passed to the heirs
of the debtor, or, if they are minor, to their guardians, so that they may declare either that they do not
know the existence of the debt or that they know that the debt has been paid.

Article 379
1. The term of prescription in respect of rights referred to in Articles (376) and (378) runs from the time that
the things were made by the creditors, even when the creditors continue to make further things.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 55
2. Once anyone of these rights has been established by a written document, it is only prescribed after fifteen
years.

Article 380

Periods of prescription are calculated in days, not in hours; the first day does not count and prescription is
completed when the last day is at an end.

Article 381
1. Prescription runs, subject to a special provision of the law to the contrary, only from the day on which the
debt becomes due.
2. Prescription in particular only runs, in the case of a debt that is subject to a condition precedent, from the
day on which the condition is realized; in the case of an action on a warranty against eviction, only from
the date eviction takes place; in the case of a debt payable in the future, only from the date of the
expiration of the term.
3. When the date upon which the obligation becomes due depends upon the will of the creditor, prescription
runs from the date on which he is in a position to express his will.

Article 382
1. Prescription does not run whenever there is a bar, even a moral one, which prevents the creditor from
claiming his right. It also does not run between a principal and his representative.
2. Prescription of which the period is more than five years, does not run as regards persons who are legally
incapable, absent or convicted criminals, if they are not legally represented.

Article 383

Prescription is interrupted by legal proceedings even if instituted in a court without jurisdiction, by a summons
or by an attachment, by the application of a creditor for the admission of his claim in a bankruptcy or in a
distribution, or by any act of a creditor to claim his right in the course of legal proceedings.

Article 384
1. Prescription is interrupted by an express or tacit admission of the right of the creditor by the debtor.
2. A debtor who leaves a pledge in the hands of his creditor as security for his debt is deemed to have tacitly
acknowledged the debt.

Article 385
1. When prescription is interrupted, a new prescription commences to run from the time that the effect of the
act that gave rise to the interruption has ceased. The term of the new prescription will be of the same
duration as that of the former one.
2. When the debt has been confirmed by a final judgment or when, in the case of a debt prescribed after one
year, the prescription has been interrupted by the admission of the debtor, the term of the new prescription
will be fifteen years unless the debt confirmed by the judgment involves periodical recurring obligations
which will not become due until after the judgment.

Article 386
1. Prescription extinguishes the obligation, but leaves a natural obligation upon the debtor.
2. When a right is extinguished by prescription, interest and other accessories are also extinguished even if
the term of the particular prescription applying to these accessories has not expired.

Article 387
1. The judge at his own initiative cannot invoke prescription. Prescription must be invoked by the debtor, or
his creditors, or by any interested party, even if the debtor has failed to do so.
2. Prescription may be invoked at any stage of the proceedings, even before the Court of Appeal.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 56
Article 388
1. A debtor cannot renounce the prescription before he has acquired the right to invoke it, nor can he agree to
a term of prescription other than that fixed by law.
2. A person, however, who is legally capable of disposing of his rights, may renounce even tacitly, a right to
prescription which he is in a position to invoke; but a renunciation made to the detriment of his creditors
will have no effect against them.

Chapter 6 Establishment of Obligation

Article 389

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

The creditor shall bear the burden of proving the obligations, while the debtor shall bear the burden of proving
the discharge thereof.

Civil Code

Section I Personal Obligations or Rights

Book I Obligations in General

Part VI Proving the Obligation

Chapter I Literal Proof

Article 390

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. A formal instrument is a paper in which a public servant or a person in charge of a public service records
the actions performed by him or what he has received from the parties concerned in accordance with the
legal conditions and within the limits of his authority and competence.
2. If such instrument does not acquire the formal status, it shall only have the value of an informal
instrument if it is signed, stamped or fingerprinted by the persons concerned.

Article 391

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

A formal instrument shall be legally valid vis-#-vis all people in terms of all actions recorded therein performed
by its writer within the limits of his mandate, or signed by the persons concerned in his presence, unless it is
proven to be a counterfeit by the legally prescribed means.

Article 392

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 57
Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. If the original instrument exists, its official copy, whether written or photographic, shall be legally valid to
the extent to which it is a carbon copy of the original.
2. A copy shall be deemed a carbon copy unless one of the parties challenges the same. In such case, the
copy shall be examined against the original instrument.

Article 393

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

If the original official instrument is not available, the copy shall be legally valid as follows:
a. The official carbon copies, whether executable or non-executable, shall have the same legal validity as the
original if the appearance thereof does not give rise to doubt as to its being identical to the original;
b. The official photocopies of the original copies shall have the same legal validity, however, in such case,
either party may demand that the photocopy be examined against the original copy thereof; and
c. The official photocopies of the photocopies of the original copies shall not be valid, except for the purpose
of guidance only, as the case may be.

Article 394

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

An informal instrument shall be deemed issued by the person who signed it, unless this person explicitly denies
that the handwriting, signature, signature stamp, or fingerprint attributed to him is his. Inheritors or successors
are not required to deny, but it is sufficient for them to take the oath that they do not know that the handwriting,
signature, signature stamp, or fingerprint is of the person from whom the right passed to them.

Article 395

Repealed
The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968
1. An informal instrument shall not be legally valid vis-#-vis third parties at the date thereof, except when it
has a "fixed date". The instrument shall have a fixed date:
a. As of the date at which it is registered in the record designated for such purpose;
b. As of the date at which its content is recorded in another instrument with a fixed date;
c. As of the date at which it is annotated by a competent public servant;
d. As of the date of the death of a person who has a recognized trace on the instrument such as a
handwriting, signature, signature stamp, or fingerprint, or as of the date at which it becomes
impossible for one of them to write or fingerprint the instrument due to a physical incapacity. In
general, as of the date of the occurrence of any other incident mandates without doubt that that the
instrument was issued before its occurrence.
2. However, the judge may, as the case may be, decide not to apply the provision of this Article on
acquittances.

Article 396

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. Signed letters shall have the same value of the informal instruments in terms of evidence.
2. Telegrams shall also have the same value if its original, deposited with the export office, is signed by its

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 58
 sender. A telegram shall also be deemed identical to its original until evidence to the contrary is
established.
3. If the original telegram is destroyed, the telegram shall not be legally valid, except for the purpose of
guidance only.

Article 397

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. The books of merchants shall not be legally valid vis-#-vis non-merchants; however, the data contained
therein on the goods supplied by the merchants may constitute a base on which the judge may administer
the suppletory oath to either party, in the matters which may be proved by the testimony of witnesses.
2. The books of merchants shall be legally valid vis-#-vis such merchants; however, if these books are
regular, the person who wants to derive therefrom any evidence in his favor may not divide the content
thereof and exclude the items that contradict his claim.

Article 398

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

Domestic ledgers and papers shall not be legally valid vis-#-vis the persons who wrote them, except in the
following two cases:
a. If such person explicitly states therein that he has collected a debt; and
b. If such person explicitly states therein that he intends, by what he wrote in such papers, that they serve as
an instrument with respect to the persons in whose favor such papers established a right.

Article 399

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. Annotating an instrument to the effect of the discharge of the debtor shall be legally valid vis-#-vis the
creditor until otherwise is proven, even if such annotation is not signed thereby as long as the instrument
never left his possession.
2. The same provision shall apply if the creditor established, by his handwriting without signature, the
discharge of the debtor in another original copy of the instrument, or in an acquittance, and the copy or the
acquittance is in the possession of the debtor.

Civil Code

Section I Personal Obligations or Rights

Book I Obligations in General

Part VI Proving the Obligation

Chapter II Testimonial Proof

Article 400

Repealed

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 59
The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968
1. In non-commercial matters, if the value of the legal transaction exceeds (EGP 10) or if its value is
indefinite, testimonial proof may not be established to prove the existence or termination of the said
transaction, unless otherwise stipulated in an agreement or a provision.
2. Obligation shall be assessed in terms of its value at the time of conducting the legal transaction.
Testimonial proof shall be allowed if the obligation exceeds (EGP 10) only due to adding interests and
accessories to the original amount.
3. If the action includes several claims arising from multiple sources, testimonial proof shall be allowed in
every claim whose value does not exceed (EGP 10) even if the total value of such claims exceeds this
value, and even if they arose from relations between the litigants themselves or from transactions of the
same nature. The same shall apply to each fulfillment whose value does not exceed (EGP 10).

Article 401

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

Testimonial proof shall not be allowed even if the value does not exceed (EGP 10) in the following cases:
a. If it contradicts or exceeds what is included in written evidence;
b. If the requested amount is the remaining amount or a part of a right that may only be established in
writing; and
c. If a litigant claims an amount that exceeds (EGP 10), then it amends his claim to an amount not exceeding
such value.

Article 402

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. Testimonial proof shall be allowed in cases that should have been proved in writing where the principle of
literal proof exists.
2. Any writing by a litigant, which would make the claimed transaction likely to exist, shall be considered a
principle of literal proof.

Article 403

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

Testimonial proof shall also be allowed in cases that should have been proved in writing if:
a. There is a material or moral impediment that hinders obtaining written proof; and
b. A creditor losses his written instrument for a reason beyond his control.

Civil Code

Section I Personal Obligations or Rights

Book I Obligations in General

Part VI Proving the Obligation

Chapter III Presumptions

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 60
Article 404

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

Legal presumptions relieves the person in whose favor such a presumption was established from the need for
any other means of evidence; however, such presumption may be challenged by counterevidence, unless
otherwise stipulated.

Article 405

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. Judgments that have res judicata shall be binding with respect to the rights settled thereby, and no
evidence that would challenge such presumption shall be admissible. However, such judgments shall not
have such binding force, except in a dispute arising between the same litigants without changing their
capacities and where such disputes relate to the same right in terms of object and cause.
2. The court may not sua sponte take such presumption in consideration.

Article 406

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

The civil judge shall not be bound by the criminal judgment, except with respect to the facts on which such the
judgment was issued and his decision thereon was necessary.

Article 407

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

Inferring any presumption not provided for by the law shall be left to the discretion of the judge. Such
presumptions may not be used as proof, except in the cases where the law allows testimonial proof.

Civil Code

Section I Personal Obligations or Rights

Book I Obligations in General

Part VI Proving the Obligation

Chapter IV Acknowledgement

Article 408

Repealed

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 61
The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

Acknowledgement is the admission of the litigant before the court of a fait juridique for which he is sued,
during the proceedings of the lawsuit relating to such incident.

Article 409

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. Acknowledgment is proof limited to the person who made the acknowledgment.
2. Acknowledgment shall not be divisible with respect to the person who made it unless it relates to several
facts, and the existence of one of them does not necessarily require the existence of others.

Civil Code

Section I Personal Obligations or Rights

Book I Obligations in General

Part VI Proving the Obligation

Chapter V Oath

Article 410

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. Each litigant may tender the assertory oath to the opposing litigant; however, the judge may reject the
tendering of oath if the litigant arbitrarily tenders it.
2. The litigant to whom the oath is tendered may tender it back to his opposing litigant; however, the oath
may not be tendered if it relates to an event involving both litigants, but only the litigant to whom the oath
is tendered shall take the oath.

Article 411

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. The assertory oath may not be tendered in a merit that contradicts the public order. The merit on which the
oath is tendered shall relate to the person to whom the oath is tendered. If such merit is not personal, the
oath shall relate to the person's mere awareness thereof.
2. The assertory oath may be tendered whatever the status of the action is.

Article 412

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

The party who tenders or tenders the oath back may not recede if the opposing party agrees to take the oath.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 62
Article 413

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

The litigant may not approve the false oath after the oath is taken by the opposing litigant to whom the oath was
tendered or tendered back ; however, if an oath is proved to be false under a criminal judgment, the injured
litigant may claim for compensation, without prejudice to any right thereof to challenge the judgment rendered
against him.

Article 414

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

Any person to whom the oath is tendered and who abstains from taking the oath without tendering the oath back
to the opposing party and any person to whom the oath is tendered back and who abstains from taking the oath
shall lose his lawsuit.

Article 415

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. The judge may, sua sponte, tender the suppletory oath to either litigant to base thereon his judgment on
the subject matter of the action or the value subject of the judgment.
2. In order to tender such oath, the action must not have complete evidence nor shall it be void of any
evidence.

Article 416

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

A litigant to whom the suppletory oath is tendered by a judge may not tender this oath back to the opposing
litigant.

Article 417

Repealed

The final text of the Article dated: 30/05/1968

1. The judge may not tender the suppletory oath to the claimant to determine the value of the claim, unless it
is impossible to determine such value by any other means.
2. Even in this case, the judge shall set a maximum value to be believed by the judge based on the Claimant's
oath.

Book 2 Specific Contracts

Chapter 1 Contracts Associated with Ownership

Section 1 Sale

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 63
1. Sale in general

Article 418 Elements of Sale

Sale is a contract whereby the Seller binds himself to transfer to the purchaser the ownership of a thing or any
other propriety right in consideration of a price in money.

Article 419
1. The purchaser must have a sufficient acquaintance with the thing sold. This acquaintance will be deemed
sufficient if the contract contains the description of the thing sold and its essential qualities, so that it may
be identified.
2. The statement in a deed of sale that the purchaser is acquainted with the thing, deprives him of the right to
claim annulment of the sale on the ground of want of acquaintance with the thing, unless he proves fraud
on the part of the Seller.

Article 420
1. When the sale is made according to sample, the thing sold should conform to the sample.
2. If the sample deteriorates or perishes while in custody of one of the contracting parties, even if it was not
his fault, it is incumbent upon that party, whether he is Seller or buyer, to establish that the thing is or is
not in conformity with the sample.

Article 421
1. In a sale upon trial, the purchaser has the option either to accept or to refuse the thing sold, but the Seller
is bound to allow the purchaser to make the trial. If the purchaser refuses the thing sold, he must give
notice of his refusal within the time agreed or, in the absence of agreement, within a reasonable time to be
fixed by the Seller. When this time has elapsed the silence of the purchaser who had the opportunity to try
the thing sold, is equivalent to acceptance.
2. A sale upon trial is deemed to have been made subject to a condition precedent of acceptance of the thing
sold, unless it appears from the agreement or from the circumstances that the sale was made subject to a
condition subsequent.

Article 422

In a sale made subject to tasting, the purchaser may accept the thing sold if he sees fit, but he must declare his
acceptance within the time fixed by the agreement or by custom. The sale will be considered complete only
from the date of such declaration.

Article 423
1. The method of establishing the price may be confined to the indication of the basis on which the price will
be ultimately fixed.
2. When it is agreed that the price will be the market price, the market price will, in case of doubt, be that at
the place where and at the time when the thing sold should be delivered to the purchaser; if there is no
market at the place of delivery, reference should be made to the market price at the place at which the
prices are customarily deemed applicable.

Article 424

When the contracting parties have not fixed a price for the thing sold the sale shall not be void if the
circumstances show that the parties intended to adopt the current trade price or the price which they have
usually applied in their dealings one with another.

Article 425

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 64
1. When an immovable belonging to a person who is legally incapable, has been sold with a lesion of more
than one fifth of its value, the Seller will have a right of action with a view to making up the price to four
fifths of the normal price.
2. In order to ascertain whether the lesion was of more than one fifth, the value of the immovable at the time
of the sale should be ascertained.

Article 426
1. The right to bring an action for a supplement of price on the ground of lesion is prescribed within three
years from the time the legal incapacity ceases, or from the date of the death of the owner of the
immovable sold.
2. Such proceedings do not operate to the prejudice of third parties in good faith who have acquired a real
right on the immovable sold.

Article 427

This action for supplement of price on the grounds of lesion does not lie in respect of sales by public auction
conducted in accordance with the provisions of the law.

Article 428 Obligations of the Seller

The Seller is bound to perform everything necessary to transfer the right to the thing sold to the purchaser, and
to abstain from all acts that might render this transfer impossible or difficult.

Article 429

When goods are sold in bulk, ownership is transferred to the purchaser in the same way as ownership of a
definite and ascertained thing. There is sale of goods in bulk even when the amount of the price depends on the
pricing of the goods sold.

Article 430
1. In a credit sale the Seller may stipulate that the transfer of ownership to the purchaser is subject to integral
payment of the price, even if the thing sold has been delivered.
2. If the price is payable by installments, the contracting parties may agree that the Seller may retain a part of
the price by way of damages should the sale be cancelled for non-payment of all the installments. The
judge may, however, according to circumstances, reduce the amount of damages agreed, by applying the
provisions of paragraph 2 of Article (224).
3. When all the installments have been paid, the transfer of the ownership of the thing sold shall be deemed
to have taken place as from the date of sale.
4. The provisions of the three preceding paragraphs are applicable even if the contracting parties have
described the sale as lease.

Article 431

The Seller is bound to deliver the thing sold to the purchaser in the state in which it was at the time of the sale.

Article 432

Delivery includes delivery of the accessories of the thing sold and of everything which, according to the nature
of things, local custom and the intention of the parties, was appropriated permanently for the use of the thing.

Article 433
1. When the quantity of the thing sold is fixed in the contract, the Seller, subject to any agreement to the
contrary, is liable for any deficiency in such quantity in accordance with custom. The purchaser has not,
however, the right to demand cancellation of the contract by reason of such deficiency, unless he

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 65
 establishes that the deficiency is so great that if he had known of it he would not have entered into the
contract.
2. If, on the contrary, the quantity exceeds that indicated in the contract, and if the price has been fixed by
unit, the purchaser must, when the object of the purchase cannot be divided, make up the price, unless the
excess is very great, in which case he may demand cancellation of the contract, all subject to an agreement
to the contrary.

Article 434

In a case of deficiency or excess in the thing sold, the right of the purchaser to apply for a reduction of the price
or for cancellation of the contract, and the right of the Seller to claim that the price be made up, are both
prescribed within one year from the date of the actual delivery of the thing sold.

Article 435
1. Delivery consists in placing the thing sold at the disposal of the purchaser in such a way that he can take
possession of and enjoy it without hindrance, even if he does not take effective delivery thereof, provided
the Seller informs him that the thing is at his disposal. Delivery is effected in accordance with the nature
of the thing sold.
2. Delivery may be completed by the mere fact of agreement between the parties when the thing sold was in
possession of the purchaser prior to the sale or if the Seller retains the thing sold in his possession after the
sale by virtue of some reason other than that of ownership.

Article 436

When the thing sold must be exported to the purchaser, delivery will not be effective, subject to an agreement to
the contrary, until the thing reaches him.

Article 437

If the thing sold perishes before delivery as a result of a cause beyond the control of the Seller, the sale shall be
dissolved and the price refunded to the purchaser, unless he was summoned to take delivery before the loss.

Article 438

If the value of the thing sold is diminished by deterioration before delivery, the purchaser shall have the option
either of applying for the cancellation of the sale, if the diminution is so great that the sale would not have taken
place if the diminution had happened before the contract was concluded, or of upholding the sale at a reduced
price.

Article 439

The Seller warrants the purchaser against disturbance in his enjoyment of the thing sold both totally and
partially, whether such disturbance is caused by his act or that of a third party having a right over the thing sold
at the time of the sale enforceable against the purchaser. The Seller is bound by his warranty, even if the right of
the third party has been established after the sale, provided that it was derived from the Seller himself.

Article 440
1. When an action for revendication in respect of the thing sold is brought against the purchaser, the Seller,
upon receipt of notice of the action, shall, according to the circumstances and in conformity with the
provisions of the Code of Procedure, join as a co-defendant with the purchaser, or take his place as
defendant in the action.
2. If notice is given in due time, the Seller who has not joined in the action, is liable under his warranty,
unless he proves that the judgment given in the action is the result of fraud or of gross fault on the part of
the purchaser.
3. If the purchaser does not notify the Seller of the action brought against him in due time and is

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 66
 dispossessed by a judgment that has become final, he shall be deprived of his right of recourse under the
warranty, if the Seller establishes that, had he joined in the action, he would have succeeded in obtaining
the dismissal of the action for revendication.

Article 441

The right of a purchaser to warranty exists even if he has acknowledged, in good faith, the third party's claim or
has entered into a compromise with him without awaiting a decision of the court, if he has, in due time, given
notice of the action to the Seller and has, without result, called upon him to take his place in the action, subject
always, to proof by the Seller that the third party's claim is unfounded.

Article 442

When the purchaser has avoided total or partial dispossession of the thing sold by paying a sum of money or by
performing some other thing, the Seller may free himself from the consequences of warranty by refunding to the
purchaser the sum paid, or the value of the thing performed, together with legal interest and all expenses.

Article 443

In case of total dispossession, the purchaser may claim from the Seller:
1. The value of the thing sold at the time of dispossession, together with legal interest from that time.
2. The value of the profits derived from the thing sold that the purchaser has been obliged to restore to the
person entitled to the thing.
3. All sums usefully spent which he cannot claim from the person entitled to the thing, together with
expenditure of a superfluous character if the Seller acted in bad faith.
4. All costs incurred in the action upon the warranty and the action of revendication, with the exception of
those costs that the purchaser could have avoided by notifying the Seller of the action of revendication, in
accordance with Article (440).
5. Generally, compensation for the losses sustained and profits missed as a result of dispossession of the
thing sold.
Unless in all these cases the purchaser's action against the Seller is based on a demand for dissolution or for
annulment of the sale.

Article 444
1. In case of partial dispossession, or if the thing sold is encumbered with a charge, the purchaser, if the loss
is of such a nature that, had he been cognizant thereof, he would not have entered into the contract, may
claim from the Seller the sums provided for in the preceding article, provided that he returns to the Seller
the things sold and the profits derived therefrom.
2. If the purchaser prefers to retain the thing sold or where the loss sustained by him does not attain the
degree defined in the preceding paragraph, he has only the right to apply for compensation in respect of
the loss he has sustained as a result of the dispossession.

Article 445
1. The contracting parties may, by special agreement, increase the warranty against dispossession, restrict it
or stipulate that the sale is without warranty.
2. The Seller is presumed to have stipulated that he does not warrant a purchaser against a servitude if it was
apparent or disclosed by him to the purchaser.
3. A clause that the sale is without warranty or restricting the warranty is null and void if the Seller
intentionally conceals the rights of a third party.

Article 446
1. Notwithstanding a clause excluding warranty, a Seller remains liable for any dispossession resulting from
his acts. Any agreement to the contrary is null and void.
2. He is also bound, in case of dispossession as a result of the act of a third party, to refund to the purchaser
the value of the thing sold at the time of dispossession, unless he can prove that the purchaser knew at the

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 67
 time of the sale of the grounds of dispossession, or that he purchased the thing at his own risk and peril.

Article 447
1. The Seller is liable under his warranty, when, at the time of delivery, the thing sold does not possess the
qualities the existence of which he guaranteed to the purchaser, or when the thing sold has defects
diminishing its value or usefulness for the purpose for which it was intended, as shown by the contract or
resulting from the nature or the destined use of the thing. The Seller is answerable for these defects, even
if he was ignorant of their existence.
2. The Seller, however, is not answerable for the defects of which the purchaser was aware at the time of the
sale or which he could have discovered himself had he examined the thing with the care of a reasonable
person, unless the purchaser proves that the Seller has affirmed to him the absence of these defects or
fraudulently concealed them from him.

Article 448

The Seller is not liable for defects which are customarily tolerated.

Article 449
1. When the purchaser has taken delivery of the thing sold, he must ascertain its condition as soon as he is
able to do so in accordance with common usage. If he discovers a defect for which the Seller is
answerable, he must give notice thereof to the Seller within a reasonable time, failing which he will be
deemed to have accepted the thing sold.
2. In the case, however, of defects that cannot be discovered by means of normal inspection, the purchaser
shall, upon the discovery of the defect, at once give notice thereof to the Seller, failing which he will be
deemed to have accepted the thing sold with its defects.

Article 450

Where the purchaser has given notice to the Seller of the defect in the thing in due time, he will be entitled to
bring an action on the warranty in accordance with Article (444).

Article 451

An action on a warranty exists even if the thing sold has perished, no matter the cause may be.

Article 452
1. An action on a warranty is prescribed in one year from the time of delivery of the thing sold, even if the
purchaser discovers the defect after the expiration of this delay, unless the Seller agrees to be bound by
the warranty for a longer period.
2. The Seller, however, cannot avail himself of the prescription of one year if it is proved that he has
fraudulently concealed the defect from the purchaser.

Article 453

The contracting parties may, by specific agreement, increase, restrict or abolish the warranty. Nevertheless, any
clause abolishing or restricting the warranty is void if the Seller intentionally and fraudulently conceals the
defects of the thing sold.

Article 454

No warranty exists against defects in the case of a judicial sale or administrative sale by auction.

Article 455

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 68
Where a Seller has warranted the proper working of the thing sold for an agreed period of time, the purchaser, in
the case of a defect subsequently appearing in the thing sold, must, under pain of forfeiture of his right to the
warranty and subject to any agreement to the contrary, give notice to the Seller within one month from the date
of the appearance of the defect and commence an action within six months from the date of notification.

Obligations of the Purchaser:

Article 456
1. Subject to a clause or custom to the contrary, the price is payable at the place where the delivery of the
thing sold is made.
2. If the price is not payable at the time of delivery of the thing sold, payment must be made at the domicile
of the purchaser on due date.

Article 457
1. Subject to a clause or custom to the contrary, the price is payable at the time delivery of the thing sold is
made.
2. When the purchaser is disturbed in his enjoyment by a third party invoking a right existing prior to the
sale or derived from the Seller, or if he is in danger of being dispossessed of the thing sold, he may,
subject to an agreement to the contrary, retain the price until the disturbance in his enjoyment or the
danger of dispossession has ceased. The Seller may, however, in such a case, demand payment of the
price upon his supplying security.
3. The provisions of the preceding paragraph will also apply if the purchaser has discovered a defect in the
thing sold.

Article 458
1. Subject to an agreement or custom to the contrary, the Seller is not entitled to legal interest on the price,
unless he has placed the purchaser in default by a formal summons, or unless the thing sold is productive
of fruits or other profits and he has delivered the thing sold to the purchaser.
2. Subject to an agreement or usage to the contrary, the purchaser acquires the revenues and increases in
value of, and is liable for all charges in connection with the thing sold from the time the sale is concluded.

Article 459
1. When the whole or part of the price is payable immediately, the Seller, unless he grants the purchaser a
delay for payment after the date of the sale, may retain the thing sold until he obtains payment of the
amount due, even if the purchaser has offered a mortgage or security.
2. The Seller may also retain the thing sold, even if the agreed date of payment has not fallen due, if the
purchaser loses the benefit of the term in accordance with the provisions of Article (273).

Article 460

If the thing sold perishes while in possession of the Seller while exercising his right of retention, the purchaser
is liable for the loss unless the thing sold perishes as a result of an act of the Seller.

Article 461

In the case of a sale of commodities or other movable effects, when a term is agreed for payment of the price
and for taking delivery, the sale will, subject to an agreement to the contrary, and at the option of the Seller, be
ipso facto dissolved without any summons being necessary if the price is not paid upon due date.

Article 462

In the absence of an agreement or usage to the contrary, the costs of the deed of sale, stamp duties, transcription
fees and all other expenses are borne by the purchaser.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 69
Article 463

In the absence of agreement or usage indicating the place and time of delivery, the purchaser is bound to take
delivery of the thing sold at the place where it was at the time of the sale and to remove it without delay, subject
to the time necessary for such removal.

Article 464

Subject to usage or to an agreement to the contrary, the costs of taking delivery of the thing sold are borne by
the purchaser.

2. Some types of Sale

Article 465 Sale with Option to Repurchase

When a Seller reserves to himself at the time of the sale the right to take back the thing sold, within a fixed time,
the sale shall be void.

Article 466 Sale of a Third Party's Property

1. When a person sells a definite and specified thing of which he is not the owner, the purchaser may
demand the annulment of the sale. This rule also applies when the thing sold is an immovable, whether the
deed has been transcribed or not.
2. Such a sale cannot, in any case, have any effect as against the owner of the thing sold, even if the
purchaser has ratified the contract.

Article 467

If the owner ratifies the sale, the contract will become binding on him and valid as regards the purchaser.

The sale will also become valid as regards the purchaser if the ownership of the thing sold devolves upon the
Seller subsequently to the conclusion of the contract.

Article 468

When the annulment of the sale has been pronounced in court in favor of a purchaser who was unaware that the
thing sold did not belong to the Seller, he shall be entitled to claim damages even if the Seller acted in good
faith.

Article 469 Sale of Litigious Rights

1. When the owner of a litigious right has assigned it to a third party for valuable consideration, the debtor,
against whom the right has been assigned, may extinguish the right assigned by paying to the assignee the
actual price paid by him, together with expenses and interest accrued on the price from the date of
payment of the price.
2. The right is deemed to be litigious if there is an action in court or serious controversy in respect thereof.

Article 470

The provisions of the preceding Article do not apply in the following cases:
a. When the litigious right forms part of a group of properties sold in bulk for a single price.
b. When the litigious right is indivisible amongst several heirs or co-owners and one sells his share to
another.
c. When a debtor has assigned to his creditor the litigious right in payment of his debt.
d. When the litigious right is a right burdening an immovable and such right is sold to a third party in

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 70
 possession of the immovable.

Article 471

No member of the magistracy or of the Parquet, no lawyer, Clerk, or bailiff of a court may, under pain of nullity
of the sale, purchase, either in his own name, or in the name of intermediary, in whole or in part, any litigious
rights coming within the jurisdiction of the court in the district of which he exercises his functions.

Article 472

No lawyer may, under pain of nullity, either in his name or in the name of an intermediary, enter into an
agreement with his client with regard to a litigious right, when he has undertaken to defend this right.

Article 473 Sale of Legacy

A person who sells an inheritance without giving particulars thereof, only warrants that he is an heir, unless
otherwise agreed.

Article 474

In the sale of an inheritance, the transfer of rights comprised therein will have no effect as regards third parties,
unless the necessary formalities for the transfer of each of these rights have been fulfilled. If the law provides
for specific formalities for the transfer of these rights between the parties, such formalities should also be
fulfilled.

Article 475

The Seller, if he has been paid off the debts or sold any of the property forming part of the inheritance, must
reimburse the purchaser up to the amount he has received, unless he has inserted in the contract of sale an
express clause of non-reimbursement.

Article 476

The purchaser must reimburse the Seller whatever he may have paid in respect of the debts of the inheritance
and pay him anything that is due to him by the estate, subject to any agreement to the contrary.

Article 477 Sale During a Person's Terminal Illness

1. A sale made by a person during his last illness, to an heir or to a person who is not an heir, at a price
inferior to the value of the thing sold at the time of his death, is valid against the heirs if the difference
between the value of the thing sold and the price paid does not exceed one third of the value of the
inheritance, including the thing sold.
2. If this difference exceeds one third of the value of the inheritance, the sale is only valid against the heirs
with regard to the excess over one third of the value, if the heirs ratify the sale or if the purchaser pays to
the estate the amount necessary to make up the two thirds.
3. The provisions of Article (916) apply to a sale made a during a person's last illness.

Article 478

The provisions of the preceding articles do not apply to the prejudice of a third party in good faith who has
acquired for valuable consideration a real right over the property sold.

Article 479 Sale by an Agent to Himself

Subject to the provisions of any other laws, no person who represents another person by virtue of an agreement,

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 71
a provision in the law or an order of a competent authority may purchase, either in his own name or in the name
of an intermediary, even at a public auction, property entrusted to him for sale in his representative capacity,
unless he had been authorized to do so by an order of the court.

Article 480

No brokers or experts may purchase in their name or in the name of an intermediary, goods which they have
been entrusted to sell or to appraise.

Article 481

A sale in the cases referred to in the two preceding articles becomes valid if it is confirmed by the person on
behalf of whom the sale was carried out.

Section 2 Swap (Contracts of Exchange)

Article 482

Swap (Contracts of Exchange) is a contract by which the contracting parties mutually bind themselves to
transfer to the other by way of exchange the ownership of a thing other than money.

Article 483

If the things exchanged have different values in the estimation of the contracting parties, the difference may be
compensated by the payment of an equivalent sum of money.

Article 484

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the principal and incidental expenses of a swap agreement
(contract of exchange) shall be borne by the parties in equal shares.

Article 485

The provisions governing sale shall apply to contracts of exchange as far as the nature of exchange allows. Each
one of the exchanging parties is deemed to be the Seller of the thing given by him in exchange and the
purchaser of the thing received in exchange.

Section 3 Gifts

1. Elements of a Gift

Article 486
1. A gift is a contract by which the donor disposes, without consideration, of property belonging to him.
2. A donor may, without being divested of the intention of making a gift, impose upon the donee the
performance of a specific obligation.

Article 487
1. A gift is not complete until it is accepted by the donee or by his representative.
2. If the donor is the natural or legal guardian of the donee, he may accept the gift on his behalf and take
delivery thereof.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 72
Article 488
1. The gift must be made by an authentic document under pain of nullity, unless it is made in the form of
some other contract.
2. A gift of movables, however, may be completed by delivery to the donee, without an official instrument
being necessary.

Article 489

The donor, or his heirs, who voluntarily give effect to a gift which is null by reason of a defect in form, cannot
demand the restitution of what they have delivered.

Article 490

A promise to provide a gift is not binding unless it is made by an authentic document.

Article 491

If the gift is of a definite and specific thing which does not belong to the donor, it is governed by the provisions
of Articles (466) and (467).

Article 492

A gift of future property is void.

2. The Effects of a Gift

Article 493

When the donee has not taken possession of the thing given, the donor is under an obligation to deliver it to
him. The provisions as to the delivery of a thing sold shall, in such a case, apply.

Article 494
1. Unless otherwise agreed, a donor is under no obligation of warranty against dispossession unless he has
intentionally hidden the cause of dispossession or unless the gift has been made for valuable
consideration. In the first case, the judge will award the donee equitable compensation for the prejudice
that he has suffered. In the second case, the donor is only bound up to the value of the consideration paid
by the donee.
2. In a case of dispossession of the gift, the donee is subrogated into the rights and actions of the donor.

Article 495
1. A donor does not warrant that the thing given is free of defects.
2. If, however, the donor has intentionally hidden a defect or if he has warranted that the thing donated is
free of defects, he will be liable to compensate the donee for loss caused by this defect. He will also be
bound to pay compensation if the gift is made for valuable consideration, provided that the amount of
compensation does not exceed the value of the consideration given by the donee.

Article 496

A donor is only liable for his intentional acts or for his gross fault.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 73
Article 497

A donee is bound to perform the consideration imposed upon him, whether such consideration is in favor of the
donor, a third party or in the public interest.

Article 498

If it appears that the value of the gift is less than that of the consideration imposed, the donee shall only be liable
to perform the consideration to the extent of the value of the thing donated.

Article 499
1. If the donor stipulates that the donee shall, in consideration of the gift, discharge his debts, the donee shall
only be liable, unless otherwise agreed, to discharge debts existing at the time of the gift.
2. If the thing donated is burdened with a real right securing a debt due by the donor or by a third party, the
donee shall be liable, unless otherwise agreed, to pay this debt.

3. Revocation of a Gift

Article 500
1. A donor may revoke a gift if the donee consents to his so doing.
2. If the donee does not consent to the revocation, the donor may apply to the court for authority to revoke
the gift whenever he has reasonable grounds in support and when there is no obstacle to the revocation.

Article 501

There are, in particular, reasonable grounds for the revocation of a gift:

a. If the donee has failed in his duties towards the donor or one of his relatives, and such failure constitutes
serious ingratitude on his part.
b. If the donor has become unable to maintain himself in accordance with his social position or to meet an
obligation to pay alimony which he is legally bound to pay to another person.
c. In the event of a child being born to the donor after the donation, and still being alive at the time of
revocation, or if the donor had a child which he believed dead at the time of the donation, which child is
discovered to be still alive.

Article 502

An application for the revocation of a gift shall be rejected if one of the following obstacles exists:
a. If there is an inherent increase of the thing given, involving an increase in value thereof; but if this
obstacle disappears, the right of revocation is renewed.
b. If one of the parties to the gift dies.
c. If the donee has definitely alienated the thing given; if, however, such alienation is only partial, the donor
may revoke the gift as to the part remaining.
d. If the gift is made by one spouse to another, even if the donor wishes to revoke the gift after the
dissolution of the marriage.
e. If the gift is made for the benefit of a relative with whom marriage is prohibited.
f. If the thing given has perished while in possession of the donee, whether by the act of the donee, by a
cause beyond his control not attributable to him, or by use; if, however, the loss is partial, the revocation
may be for the part remaining.
g. If the donee has supplied a compensation for the gift.
h. If the gift constitutes alms or an act of charity.

Article 503
1. A gift revoked by mutual consent or by a judgment is deemed to be null and void.
2. The donee is only liable for the restitution of the fruits as from the date of agreement of revocation or

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 74
 from the date of commencement of legal proceedings. He has the right to claim repayment of all necessary
expenses that he has incurred and also of sums usefully spent by him but only up to the amount of any
increase in value of the thing donated.

Article 504
1. If, without consent of the donee or without a decision of the court, the donor takes back the thing given,
he is responsible to the donee for the loss of the thing donated whether such loss occurs from his act, from
a cause beyond his control which is not attributable to him or as a result of the use of the thing.
2. If the revocation of the gift is pronounced by a judgment and the thing donated perishes while in the
possession of the donee, after he has been formally summoned to hand back the thing, the donee is
responsible for loss even if it resulted from force majeure.

Section 4 The Company

Article 505

Company is a contract by which two or more persons undertake to contribute jointly in an undertaking of a
pecuniary nature by the provision of contributions of property or services, with the object of sharing in the
profits or the losses of the undertaking.

Article 506
1. A company is deemed, by the fact of its constitution, to be a juristic person; such juristic personality is
however acquired, as regards third parties, only upon completion of the formalities of publication required
by law.
2. Third parties may, however, if the company has not completed the prescribed formalities of publication,
avail themselves of the juristic personality of the company.

1. Elements of the Company

Article 507
1. Articles of Association must be in writing under pain of nullity. All modifications to the Articles of
Association are also void if they are not executed in the same form as the deed.
2. Such nullity cannot, however, be pleaded by the partners against third parties and has no effect on the
relationship of the partners between themselves until a demand for such nullity has been made in court by
one of the partners.

Article 508

In the absence of agreement or custom to the contrary, the contributions of the partners are presumed to be equal
and to consist of the ownership of the property brought in and not merely of its enjoyment.

Article 509

The influence or the credit of a partner cannot alone constitute his contribution.

Article 510

A partner who has undertaken to contribute a sum of money and who does not pay this sum into the company is
liable, without recourse to legal proceedings or to any formal demand, to payment of interest from the date that
his contribution fell due, apart from payment, in addition, of compensation for any loss, whenever necessary.

Article 511

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 75
1. If the contribution of a partner consists of a right of ownership, of an usufruct, or of any other real right,
the provisions as to sale shall apply as regards warranties against loss, dispossession, hidden defects or
deficiencies.
2. If, however, the contribution consists merely of the use of the property, the provisions as to lease apply as
regards the above warranties.

Article 512
1. If the contribution of a partner consists of his services, he shall carry out the services he has undertaken to
perform and render an account of the profits realized from the date of the formation of the company as a
result of the services he has undertaken as his contribution.
2. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, he is not bound, however, to contribute to the company
patents which he has obtained.

Article 513

If the contribution of a partner consists of debts due by third parties, his obligation to the company is only
extinguished by the recovery of these debts. He is also liable for damages if the debts are not paid when they fall
due.

Article 514
1. If the share of each of the partners in the profits and the losses of the company is not fixed in the deed of
company, their respective shares shall be proportional to their respective contributions in the capital of the
company.
2. If the deed of company only fixes the share of each partner in the profits, the same proportion shall apply
as regards the losses, and reciprocally if only the share in the losses is fixed in the Articles of Association.
3. If the contribution of one of the partners consists only of his services, his share in the profits and the
losses is estimated in accordance with the profits that the company realizes as a result of his services. If, in
addition to his services, a partner has made a contribution in money or in kind, he will be entitled to a
share in respect of his services and another share in respect of the contribution he has made in addition to
his services.

Article 515
1. If it is agreed that one of the partners shall not participate in the profits or losses of the company, the
Articles of Association is void.
2. A partner who only contributes his services may be relieved by agreement from participation in the losses
of the company, provided that no remuneration is allowed to him in respect of his services.

2. The Management of Company

Article 516
1. A partner entrusted with the management of the company by a special clause in the Articles of
Association is entitled, notwithstanding objections by the other partners, to perform acts of management
and acts of disposition coming within the objects of the company, provided that these administrative acts
and acts of disposition are not tainted with fraud. Such partner cannot, without legitimate reason, be
discharged from his post as managing partner so long as the company exists.
2. If the appointment of a managing partner is made subsequent to the Articles of Association, such an
appointment may be revoked in the same manner as an ordinary Agency.
3. Managers who are not partners may be discharged at any time.

Article 517
1. When several partners are entrusted with the management of the company without their respective
attributions being defined and it is not provided that anyone of them cannot act alone, each partner may
separately perform any act of management, subject to the right which each of the other managing partners
has to object to such an act before it has been completed, and to the right of the majority of the managing

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 76
 partners to override such an objection; in the case of equal voting by the managing partners, the rights to
override the objection belongs to the majority of all the partners.
2. If it is provided that decisions of managing partners shall be taken unanimously or by a majority, such a
provision cannot be departed from, except in the case of an urgent matter in which failure to take action
would involve the company in serious and irreparable loss.

Article 518

When a decision must be taken by the majority, it will, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, be
decided by the numerical majority.

Article 519

Partners who are not managing partners are excluded from the management. They are entitled, however,
personally to examine the books and documents of the company. Any agreement to the contrary is void.

Article 520

In the absence of any special provisions as to the form of management, each partner is deemed to have been
authorized by the other partners to manage the company, and may carry out the management without consulting
the other partners, subject to the right of such other partners or of anyone of them to object to any act of
management before it has been finally completed and to the right of the majority of the partners to override such
objection.

3. The Effects of Company

Article 521
1. Each partner shall abstain from any activity prejudicial to the interests of the company or contrary to the
object for which the company was formed.
2. He shall watch over the interests of the company as if they were his own, unless he has been appointed a
manager on remuneration, in which case he shall not exercise less care than would a prudent man.

Article 522
1. A partner who takes or retains a sum of money belonging to the company will, without any legal
summons or formal demand, be liable for interest on the sum from the day he took it or retained it,
without prejudice to the compensation for loss entitled for the company, when necessary.
2. A partner who advances money to the company from his private funds or incurs in good faith without
imprudence trifling expenses for the benefit and on behalf of the company, is entitled to interest thereon
from the company from the date of payment thereof.

Article 523
1. If the assets of the company does not cover its debts, the partners shall, in the absence of an agreement
providing for another division, be liable for these debts from their own property, each in proportion to his
share in the losses of the company. Any agreement relieving a partner from liability in respect of the
company's debts is void.
2. The creditors of the company have in all cases a claim against each of the partners to the extent of his
share in the profits of the company.

Article 524
1. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the partners are not jointly and severally liable as regards
their respective shares in the debts of the company.
2. If, however, one of the partners becomes insolvent, his share in the debts of the company is apportioned
among all the others in proportion to their respective shares in the losses.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 77
Article 525

Personal creditors of a partner cannot, during the continuance of a company, obtain payment of their claims out
of such partner's share in the capital but only out of his share in the profits. Such creditors may, upon liquidation
of the company, enforce their rights on their debtor's share in the company assets after payment of the company
debts, and may, before the liquidation of the company, make a provisional attachment on the share of such
debtor.

4. Company Dissolution Methods

Article 526
1. A company comes to an end upon the expiration of its term or by the achievement of the object for which
it was formed.
2. If, notwithstanding the expiration of the term or the achievement of the object for which the company was
formed, the partners continue to carry on work of the same nature as that for which the company was
formed, the Articles of Association is extended from year to year on the same conditions.
3. A creditor of a partner may oppose this extension. His opposition will suspend the effect of the extension
of the company so far as such creditor is concerned.

Article 527
1. A company comes to an end upon the total loss of its capital or upon its partial loss to such an extent as to
render the continuation of the company useless.
2. If one of the partners has undertaken to contribute by way of a definite and specific thing which perishes
before it is brought into the company, the company is dissolved as regards all partners.

Article 528
1. A company is terminated by the death, interdiction, insolvency or bankruptcy of one of the partners.
2. It may be agreed, however, that in the event of the death of one partner, the company will continue with
his heirs, even if they are minors.
3. It may also be agreed that, in case of death, interdiction, insolvency, bankruptcy or retirement of one of
the partners in accordance with the provisions of the following article, the company will continue between
the other partners. In such a case, such partner or his heirs will only be entitled to his share in the assets of
the company. This share will be estimated in accordance with its value at the date of the event, which
resulted in the partner ceasing to be a partner, and must be paid in money. Such partner will share in
subsequent rights only to the extent that such rights arise from operations prior to the event which resulted
in his ceasing to be a partner.

Article 529
1. A company comes to an end by the retirement of one of the partners when its duration has not been fixed,
provided that such partner gives previous notice to his other co-partners of his intention to retire and that
his retirement is free of fraudulent intent and not at an unsuitable time.
2. It comes to an end also by the unanimous agreement of the partners.

Article 530
1. The court may, on the demand of any one of the partners, order the dissolution of a company for
non-performance by a partner of his obligations, or for any other reason not attributable to the partners;
the judge will decide whether such reason is sufficiently serious to justify dissolution.
2. Any agreement to the contrary is void.

Article 531
1. A partner may apply to the court for the exclusion of any one for the partners whose presence in the
company has given rise to objections to the extension of the duration of the company, or whose actions

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 78
 might be held to provide good grounds for the dissolution of the company, while the company continues
between the other partners.
2. A partner may also, if the duration of the company is fixed, apply to the court to authorize his retirement
from the company if he gives adequate reasons for his application. In such case, unless the other partners
agree to continue the company, it will be dissolved.

5. Liquidation of Company and Distribution of its Property

Article 532

The liquidation and the division of the company property is carried out in the manner laid down by the Articles
of Association. When the Articles of Association is silent, the following provisions will be applied.

Article 533

The powers of the managers shall cease upon the dissolution of the company, but the juristic personality of the
company shall continue, in so far as is necessary, for and up to the end of the liquidation.

Article 534
1. The liquidation will be carried out either by all the partners or by one or more liquidators appointed by the
majority of the partners.
2. If the partners do not agree on the appointment of a liquidator, such liquidator will, upon the application
of one of the partners, be appointed by the judge.
3. In case of nullity of company, the court will appoint a liquidator and will decide upon the method of
liquidation upon the application of any interested party.
4. Until a liquidator is appointed, the managing partners shall be deemed, as far as third parties are
concerned, to be the liquidators.

Article 535
1. A liquidator may not undertake new business on behalf of the company, unless it is necessary for the
purpose of terminating the old business.
2. He may sell movables and immovables belonging to the company by auction or by private treaty, unless
his powers in this respect have been restricted by the instrument by which he was appointed.

Article 536
1. The company assets are divided between all the partners after payment of the creditors, deduction of
amounts required to cover debts that have not fallen due or are subject to litigation and repayment of
disbursements or loans that may have been made by one of the partners for the benefit of the company.
2. Each partner shall take a sum equal to the value of his contribution to the capital of the company, as
recorded in the Articles of Association, or, if not recorded in the Articles of Association, at its value at the
time the contribution was brought to the company, unless he has only contributed his services, the
usufruct or the mere use of the thing that he has brought to the company.
3. The balance, if any, will be distributed between the partners proportionally to each partner's share in the
profits.
4. If the company assets are not sufficient to cover the repayment of the partners' contributions, the loss is
shared between the partners proportionately to each partner's share in the losses.

Article 537

The rules laid down with reference to the division of property held in common, apply to partitions between
partners.

Section 5 Loan and Perpetual annuity

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 79
1. Loan

Article 538

A loan is a contract under which the lender undertakes to transfer to the borrower the ownership of a sum of
money or other fungible upon condition that the borrower returns, at the end of the loan, a thing equal in
amount, kind and quality.

Article 539
1. The lender must deliver to the borrower the thing which is the object of the contract and cannot claim the
return of its equivalent until the end of the loan.
2. If the thing perishes before its delivery to the borrower, the loss falls on the lender.

Article 540

In the event of dispossession, the provisions relating to sale will apply if the loan is made for valuable
consideration; otherwise the provisions relating to loan will apply.

Article 541
1. When the loan is made without valuable consideration, and hidden defects appear in the thing, the
borrower, if he prefers to retain the thing, will only be liable to refund the value of the defective thing.
2. When the loan is made for valuable consideration, or when it is made without valuable consideration but
the lender has deliberately hidden the defects, the borrower may demand either that the defect be amended
or that the defective thing be replaced by a thing without defects.

Article 542

The borrower is under liability to pay the agreed interest as it falls due; in the absence of an agreement as
regards interest, the loan is deemed to be without consideration.

Article 543

A loan comes to an end upon the expiration of the term agreed upon.

Article 544

If interest is agreed, the debtor may, after six months from the date of the loan, give notice of his intention to
terminate the contract and to restitute the thing taken on loan, provided that the restitution takes place within a
term not exceeding six months of the date of the notice. In such a case the debtor shall be liable to pay the
interest due for the six months following the notice. He will not, in any case, be bound to pay interest or to
perform a thing of any kind by reason of the fact that payment is made before due date. The right of the
borrower to effect restitution cannot be forfeited or limited by agreement.

2. Perpetual annuity

Article 545
1. An undertaking may be given to supply in perpetuity a person and after him his successors with a
periodical thing consisting of a sum of money or a fixed quantity of other fungibles. This obligation may
be assumed by contract for or without valuable consideration, or by will.
2. When the thing is made by contract for valuable consideration, it is subject, as regards the rate of interest,
to the rules governing loans on interest.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 80
Article 546
1. An annuity is essentially redeemable at any time at the will of the debtor. Any agreement to the contrary is
void.
2. It may be agreed, however, that the redemption shall not take place during the lifetime of the annuitant or
before a certain length of time which shall never exceed fifteen years.
3. The right of redemption cannot in any case be exercised until notice thereof has been given and then after
one year from the date of the notice.

Article 547

The debtor may be forced to redeem in the following events:

a. If, in spite of formal summons, he does not pay the annuity for two consecutive years.
b. If he fails to supply the creditor with the securities that he has promised or if such securities disappear and
he does not provide other securities in their place.
c. If he becomes bankrupt or insolvent.

Article 548
1. If the annuity is purchased by payment of a sum of money, the redemption is made by the repayment of
the amount in full or such lesser amount, if this was agreed upon.
2. In other cases, redemption is exercised by the payment of a sum of money, on which the interest
calculated at the legal rate corresponds to the amount of the annuity.

Section 6 Compromise

1. The Elements of Compromise

Article 549

Compromise is a contract by which two parties put an end to a dispute that has arisen, or prevent a dispute that
is expected to arise, by the mutual surrender of part of their respective claims.

Article 550

In order to effect a compromise, the parties must have legal competence to dispose for valuable consideration of
the rights which are the objects of the compromise.

Article 551

A compromise cannot be made on any question touching the status of individuals or public policy, but a
compromise may be made with regard to proprietary interests arising out of the status of individuals or out of a
penal offence.

Article 552

A compromise can only be established by a written document or by an official procs-verbal.

2. The Effects of Compromise

Article 553
1. Compromise terminates the disputes in respect of which the compromise is made.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 81
2. It extinguishes the rights and claims which either of the parties have finally renounced.

Article 554

Compromise has a declaratory effect as regards the rights in respect of which the compromise is made.

This declaratory effect is limited specifically to litigious rights.

Article 555

The wording of the renunciation contained in the compromise must be strictly interpreted. The renunciation, no
matter how worded, applies to those rights only which form the precise object of the dispute settled by the
compromise.

3. Nullity of Compromise

Article 556

A compromise cannot be impugned on the ground of a mistake in the law.

Article 557
1. A compromise is indivisible. The nullity of one part of a compromise involves the nullity of the whole
contract.
2. This rule does not apply, however, when it appears, from the wording of the contract or from the
circumstances, that the parties agreed that the various parts of the compromise are independent the one of
the other.

Chapter 2 Contracts Relating to the Use of an Object

Section 1 Lease

1. Leases in General

Article 558 Elements of a Lease

A lease is a contract under which the lessor undertakes to enable the lessee to enjoy a specific thing for a certain
time in return for a fixed rent.

Article 559

In the absence of a provision of the law to the contrary, a person who has only a right of management cannot,
without the consent of the competent authority, enter into a lease for a term exceeding three years. If the lease is
granted for a longer term, it will be reduced to three years.

Article 560

A lease granted by a usufructuary, unless ratified by the bare owner, ends when the usufruct is extinguished,
subject to the delay provided for giving notice of evacuation and the time required to gather in the annual crop.

Article 561

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 82
Rent may consist either of money or of any other thing.

Article 562

If the parties have not agreed the amount of the rent or the manner in which the rent shall be fixed, or if the
amount of the rent cannot be established, it must be based on the current rent for other similar properties.

Article 563

If a lease is concluded without any agreement as to term, or for an undetermined period, or if the term cannot be
established, it is deemed to have been made for the term fixed for payment of the rent. It expires at the end of
the term in question, at the request of one of the parties, subject to notice being given by him to the other party
as follows:
a. In the case of agricultural and uncultivated land, if rent is payable six monthly or if the term for payment
is more than six months, notice must be given three months before the end of the term; if the term is less
than six months notice must be given before the last half term, subject always to the right of the lessee to
the crops in accordance with custom.
b. In the case of houses, shops, offices, and business premises, industrial establishments, warehouses and
other similar premises, if the rent is payable every four months or at longer intervals, notice must be given
two months before the end of the term; if the term is less, notice must be given before the last half term
c. In the case of apartments, furnished rooms and all kinds of premises not mentioned above, if the rent is
payable every two months, or at longer intervals, the notice must be given one month before the end of the
term; if the term is less than two months the notice must be given before the last half term.

Article 564 Effects of a Lease

The lessor is bound to deliver to the lessee the leased property and its accessories in a condition suitable for the
purpose for which it is intended, in accordance with the agreement between parties or with the nature of the
property.

Article 565
1. If the leased property is delivered to the lessee in such a condition that it is unfit for the use for which it is
leased, or if its usefulness is appreciably diminished, the lessee may demand either the termination of the
lease or a reduction of the rent equivalent to the loss of use; in both cases he is entitled to claim
compensation, if necessary.
2. If the leased property is in such a condition that it constitutes a serious danger to the health of the lessee,
or those who live with him, or his employees or workmen, the lessee may demand termination of the
lease, even if he has renounced the right to do so beforehand.

Article 566

The rules laid down as regards the obligation of delivery of the thing sold, especially as to time and place of
delivery, as to extent, weight or measure, and as to determining its accessories, are applicable to the obligation
of delivery of the leased property.

Article 567
1. The lessor is bound to maintain the leased property in the state in which it was at the time of delivery. He
must make, during the continuance of the lease, all repairs which may become necessary, except for the
"lease repairs.
2. The lessor is also bound to do such plastering and white-washing of the roofs as may be necessary, and to
clear wells, cesspools and drains.
3. The lessor is responsible for charges and taxes due on the leased property. The lessor is also responsible
for the cost of water, if it is supplied for a lump sum, but the lessee is responsible if it is supplied by
meter. The costs of electricity, gas and of other requirements for personal use are payable by the lessee.
4. The above rules only apply in the absence of agreement to the contrary.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 83
Article 568
1. If a lessor having been summoned, delays the performance of the obligations mentioned in the preceding
article, the lessee may, without prejudice to his right to claim termination of the lease or a reduction of
rent, obtain authority of the court to perform them himself and deduct the cost from the rent.
2. In the case of immediate repairs or minor repairs for which the lessor is responsible, whether resulting
from a defect existing at the time the premises were taken over by the lessee or happening subsequently,
the lessee may, without the authority of the court, carry them out and deduct the cost thereof from the rent,
if the lessor, having been summoned to do so, does not carry them out in a reasonable time.

Article 569
1. If, during the course of the lease, the leased property is totally destroyed, the lease is, ipso facto,
determined.
2. If, as a result of a cause not imputable to the lessee, the leased property is partially destroyed or
deteriorates to such an extent that it becomes unfit for the use for which it was leased, or if such a use is
appreciably diminished, the lessee may, if the lessor does not restore the leased property to its original
condition within a reasonable time, i.e., a delay which does not affect the business or activity of the lessee,
claim, according to the circumstances, either a reduction of the rent or the termination of the lease,
without prejudice to his right to perform himself the obligations of the lessor in accordance with the
provisions of the preceding article.
3. In the two preceding cases, the lessee cannot claim compensation if the loss or deterioration arises from a
cause not imputable to the lessor.

Article 570
1. The lessee must not prevent the lessor from making immediate repairs required for the preservation of the
leased property, but if such repairs cause a complete or partial loss of enjoyment, the lessee may claim,
according to the circumstances, termination of the lease or a reduction of the rent.
2. If, however, the lessee continues to occupy the premises until the repairs are completed, he will forfeit his
rights to claim termination of the lease.

Article 571
1. The lessor shall abstain from doing anything which may disturb the lessee in his enjoyment of the leased
property, and shall not make any alterations to the property or to its accessories that diminish such
enjoyment.
2. The lessor not only warrants the lessee against his own acts and against those of his servants, but also
against any disturbance or damage based on a lawful claim by any other lessee or by any successor in title
of the lessor.

Article 572
1. If a third party claims to have rights incompatible with those derived by the lessee from the agreement of
lease, the lessee shall forthwith give notice to the lessor of such a claim and shall be entitled to demand
that he be dismissed from the case. In which event proceedings will be taken solely against the lessor.
2. If, as a result of such a claim, the lessee is effectively deprived of the enjoyment to which he is entitled in
accordance with the agreement of lease, he may, in accordance with the circumstances, claim termination
of the lease or a reduction of rent together with payment of damages, if necessary.

Article 573
1. When there are several lessees of the same property, the lessee who, without fraud, first entered into
possession will have preference. If a lessee of an immovable property has, in good faith, effected
transcription of his lease, before another lessee has entered into possession or before the renewal of his
lease, such lessee will have preference.
2. In the absence of reasons giving preference to one lessee, the only recourse of a lessee in respect of any
right not enjoyed by him is a claim for damages.

Article 574

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 84
If, as a result of an act lawfully done by a Government authority, the enjoyment of the property leased is
appreciably diminished, the lessee may, in accordance with the circumstances, and unless otherwise agreed
between the parties, claim termination of the lease or a reduction of rent. If the grounds for the act of such
Government authority are the result of an act imputable to the lessor, the lessee may claim payment of damages.

Article 575
1. A lessor does not warrant the lessee against trespass by a third party who does not claim a right over the
leased property; this shall not, however, affect the right of the lessee to take action in his name against
such third party for damages and to take all other possessory actions.
2. If, however, the trespass is not in any way imputable to the lessee and is sufficiently serious to deprive
him of the enjoyment of the leased property, the lessee may, in accordance with the circumstances, claim
termination of the lease or a reduction of rent.

Article 576
1. Subject to any agreement to the contrary, the lessor warrants the lessee against all defects which prevent
or appreciably diminish the enjoyment of the property, but not against those defects that are customarily
tolerated, and is responsible for qualities which he expressly warranted to exist or do not exist which are
essential to the intended use of the property.
2. The lessor, however, does not warrant the lessee against defects of which the lessee was informed or of
which he was aware at the time of the conclusion of the contract.

Article 577
1. If the leased property is found to have a defect against which the lessee has been warranted by the lessor,
the lessee may, in accordance with the circumstances, claim termination of the lease or reduction of the
rent. The lessee may also call upon the lessor to make good the defect or do so himself at the cost of the
lessor, if the cost thereof is not an excessive burden on the lessor.
2. If the defect causes any damage to the lessee, the lessor shall be liable to pay compensation, unless the
lessor can establish that he was not aware of the defect.

Article 578

Any agreement excluding or limiting the warranty against disturbance or defects is void if the lessor has
fraudulently hidden the cause of such warranty.

Article 579

The lessee must use the leased property in the manner agreed. In the absence of any agreement, he must use the
property in accordance with the purpose for which it is destined.

Article 580
1. The lessee may not, without the permission of the lessor, make any alteration to the leased property unless
no damage is thereby occasioned to the lessor.
2. If the lessee makes alterations to the leased property in excess of the limits prescribed in the preceding
paragraph, he may be compelled to reinstate the property in its original condition and to pay
compensation, if necessary.

Article 581
1. The lessee may install in the leased property, unless the lessor can show that the installations endanger the
safety of the building, water, electric light, gas, telephone, wireless and other like installations, provided
that the manner in which such installations are made is not contrary to general practice.
2. If the intervention of the lessor is necessary for the completion of any of these installations, the lessee may
call upon the lessor to intervene, on condition that he undertakes to pay the expenses incurred by the
lessor in this connection.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 85
Article 582

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the lessee is bound to carry out "lessee's" repairs in accordance
with the custom.

Article 583
1. The lessee shall use and preserve the leased property with the care of a reasonable person.
2. The lessee is responsible for any deterioration of or loss to the leased property during his enjoyment
thereof which are not the result of normal use.

Article 584
1. The lessee is responsible for damage to the leased property by fire, unless he can establish that the cause
thereof was not imputable to him.
2. When the building is occupied by several lessees, all such lessees, including the landlord if he lives on the
premises, are responsible for the fire, each in proportion to the part he occupies, unless it is proved that the
fire started in the part occupied by one of them, in which case that one alone will be responsible.

Article 585

The lessee must forthwith notify the lessor of all matters that require his intervention, such as urgent repairs, the
discovery of defects, encroachments and disturbances or damage by third parties to the leased property.

Article 586
1. The lessee must pay the rent at the agreed times and, in the absence of agreement, at times established by
the custom of the place where the property is situated.
2. In the absence of agreement or custom to the contrary, the rent will be paid at the domicile of the lessee.

Article 587

The payment of a term's rent establishes in favor of the payee a presumption, subject to proof to the contrary,
that former terms have been paid.

Article 588

Unless the rent is paid in advance or unless the lessee provides other guarantees, the lessee of a house,
warehouse, shop or similar establishment or of agricultural land, is bound, in the absence of an agreement to the
contrary, to stock the leased property with furniture, goods, crops, cattle, or implements of sufficient value to
secure the rent for two years or for the period of the lease if less than two years.

Article 589
1. The lessor has, as warranty for all amounts due to him under the agreement of lease; a lien on all the
attachable movables stocking the leased property, while they are subject to the lessor's right of concession,
even when they do not belong to the lessee. The lessor has the right to object to their removal and if, they
are removed notwithstanding his objections or without his knowledge, to claim their recovery from their
possessor even in good faith, subject always to the rights of such possessor thereon.
2. The lessor cannot exercise his rights of retention or of recovery when the movables have been removed to
meet the professional requirements of the lessee or in accordance with customary requirements of daily
life, or if the movables remaining on the leased property or already recovered are fully sufficient to cover
the rent.

Article 590

The lessee is bound, upon the expiration of the lease, to restitute the leased property. If he retains it unlawfully,

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 86
he must pay compensation to the lessor on the basis of the rental value of the property and of the loss suffered
by the lessor.

Article 591
1. The lessee is bound to restitute the leased property in the condition in which it was at the time he took
delivery thereof, subject to loss or deterioration due to a cause not imputable to him.
2. If no procs-verbal or inventory setting out particulars of the property was drawn up at the time of delivery,
the lessee is presumed, subject to proof to the contrary, to have received the property in good condition.

Article 592
1. If the lessee has erected buildings, planted trees or made other improvements which have increased the
value of the property, the lessor is, subject to an agreement to the contrary, bound at the end of the lease to
repay him the expenses incurred by him or the increase in value of the property.
2. If such improvements were made without the knowledge of the lessor or notwithstanding his objections,
the lessor may claim their removal and may in addition call on the lessee to pay compensation, if
compensation is due, for any damage to property resulting from such removal.
3. If the lessor prefers to keep these improvements and pay one of the two amounts indicated above, the
court may give him time for settlement.

Article 593 Assignment of Lease and Sub-lease

The lessee may, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, assign his lease or sublet the whole or any part
of the leased property.

Article 594
1. A prohibition of sub-letting implies a prohibition of assignment and vice versa.
2. When, in the case of a lease of an immovable property in which an industrial or commercial establishment
has been created, circumstances have compelled the lessee to sell such industrial or commercial
establishment, the court may, notwithstanding the condition prohibiting sub-letting, decide to maintain the
lease in force if the purchaser furnishes adequate security and the lessor suffers no real prejudice thereby.

Article 595

When a lease is assigned, the principal lessee remains guarantor for the performance of the assignee's
obligations.

Article 596
1. A sub-lessee is answerable directly to the lessor for the amounts that he, the sub-lessee, owes to the lessee
as from the time a summons is served on him by the lessor.
2. A sub-lease cannot set up against the lessor payments made by him in advance to the principal lessee,
unless they were made before the summons, in accordance with custom or a formal agreement concluded
at the time of the sub-lease.

Article 597
1. A lessee ceases to be answerable to the lessor, either as guarantor of the assignee in case of the assignment
of the contract of lease, or as regards his obligations arising from the principal contract of lease in the case
of a sub-lease:
2. If the lessor has formally agreed to the assignment of lease or to the sub-lease.
3. If the lessor has received, without reserving his rights as against the lessee, the rent directly from such
assignee or sub-lessee.

Article 598 Expiration of a Lease

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 87
A lease ends at the expiration of the agreed term without it being necessary to give notice of evacuation.

Article 599
1. If, after the lease has expired, the lessee continues to enjoy the leased property to the knowledge of and
without objection on the part of the lessor, the lease is deemed to be renewed upon the same conditions
but for an indefinite duration. The lease so renewed is governed by the provisions of Article (563).
2. This tacit renewal is deemed to be a new lease and not a mere prolongation of the original lease.
Nevertheless, subject to the rules of publication applicable to real property, the real securities supplied by
the lessee in guarantee of the old lease are transferred to the new lease. The suretyship, whether personal
or real, is not transferred to the new lease unless the surety consents thereto.

Article 600

When notice of evacuation has been given by one party to the other and the lessee, notwithstanding the notice,
continues to enjoy the property after the expiration of the lease, the lease will not, subject to proof to the
contrary, be deemed to have been renewed.

Article 601 Death or Insolvency of the Lessee

1. A contract of lease is not terminated either by the death of the lessor or of the lessee.
2. In the event of the death of the lessee, however, his heirs may claim the termination of the lease if they
establish that, as a result of the death of the person whose estate they inherited, the burden of the lease has
become too heavy for their resources or that the lease exceeds their needs. In such an event, the periods of
notice of termination laid down in Article 563 shall be observed and the claim for termination of the lease
made within six months at the most from the date of the death of the lessee.

Article 602

If the lease has been granted to the lessee solely on account of his calling or of other considerations relating to
his person, his heirs or the lessor may, on his death, claim termination of the lease.

Article 603
1. The insolvency of the lessee does not render immediately payable rents that have not become due.
2. The lessor, however, may claim termination of the lease, unless he is provided within a reasonable time
with securities guaranteeing the payment of rent not due. The lessee may also, if he is not given authority
to assign the lease or to sub-let the property, claim the termination of the lease on payment of equitable
compensation.

Article 604
1. In the case of a voluntary or forced transfer of the ownership of the leased property to a third party, the
new owner is only bound by the lease if it has been given an established date prior to the act entailing the
transfer of ownership.
2. The new owner may, however, avail himself of the contract of lease, even if he is not bound by such
contract.

Article 605
1. A person acquiring the leased property, who is not bound by the lease, can only evict the lessee by giving
him notice as provided for in Article (563).
2. In the absence of a provision to the contrary, the lessor must, if notice of eviction is given before the end
of the lease, compensate the lessee. The lessee cannot be evicted before he receives compensation either
from the lessor or from the new owner paying on behalf of the lessor, or until he has obtained an adequate
security for the payment of such compensation.

Article 606

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 88
The lessee cannot set up rent paid in advance against a new owner, if the new owner proves that at the time of
payment the lessee knew or should necessarily have known of the transfer of ownership. Failing proof thereof,
the new owner shall not have a recourse against the lessor.

Article 607

When it has been agreed that the lessor may terminate the contract if he becomes personally in need of the
property, he shall, if he exercises his right, be bound, unless otherwise agreed, to give the lessee notice of
termination in accordance with the time limits provided for in Article (563).

Article 608
1. When a lease is made for a fixed period, either of the contracting parties may, if serious and unforeseen
circumstances arise of such a nature as to render, from the commencement of or during the lease, the
performance too burdensome, demand the termination of the lease before its expiration, provided he gives
notice in accordance with the delays provided for in Article (563) and pays equitable compensation to the
other party.
2. If it is the lessor who demands termination of the lease, the lessee will not be compelled to hand back the
leased property before he has been compensated or obtained adequate guarantee.

Article 609

An official or an employee whose duties oblige him to change his place of residence may claim termination of
the lease of his dwelling house, when his lease is made for a fixed period, provided that he gives notice of such
termination in accordance with the delays provided for in Article (563). Any agreement to the contrary is void.

Article 610 Some Types of Lease Leases of Agricultural Land

If the leased property is agricultural land, the lessor is not bound to hand over to the lessee cattle and
agricultural implements existing on the land unless they are included in the lease.

Article 611

When cattle and agricultural implements belonging to the lessor are handed over to the lessee, the lessee is
under the obligation to take proper care of them and to maintain them in the manner required for their
customary use.

Article 612

Where a lease of agricultural land provides that the lease is made for one or several years, it shall be deemed to
be for one or several annual agricultural cycles.

Article 613
1. A lease of agricultural land must work the land in accordance with the requirements of normal agricultural
use. He must, more particularly, maintain the land in a good state of production.
2. He must not, without the consent of the lessor, make any substantial change in the established method of
cultivating the land, the effects of which might extend beyond the period of the lease.

Article 614
1. Subject to an agreement or custom to the contrary, the lessee is bound to carry out repairs necessary for
the normal enjoyment of the leased land. He is in particular responsible for the clearing and maintenance
of canals, trenches, channels and drains. He is also responsible for the normal maintenance of roads,
dikes, bridges, fencing, wells, dwelling houses and farm buildings.
2. The erection of buildings and major repairs to existing buildings and dependencies on the land are, subject

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 89
 to any agreement or custom to the contrary, the responsibility of the lessor. The same rule applies as
regards repairs to wells, canals, water channels and reservoirs.

Article 615

If the lessee has, as a result of force majeure, been prevented from preparing or sowing the land, or if the whole
or the greater part of the seed has been destroyed thereby, he is, subject to any agreement to the contrary and as
the case may be, relieved from payment of the whole or part of the rent.

Article 616
1. If, after having sown, a lessee loses all his crop by force majeure before harvest time, he can demand
remission of the rent.
2. If the crop is only partially destroyed, but a considerable decrease in yield results therefrom, the lessee
may demand a reduction of the rent.
3. The lessee cannot demand a remission or a reduction of rent if he is compensated against his loss either by
the profits he has derived during the whole period of the lease, by an amount received under an insurance
policy or by any other means.

Article 617

If, at the end of a lease, the harvest has not ripened for reasons not imputable to the lessee, he may, upon
payment of a proportional rent, remain on the leased land until the harvest ripens.

Article 618

An outgoing lessee shall do nothing of a nature to diminish or retard the enjoyment of the land by an incoming
lessee. He is bound, in particular, just before vacating the land, to allow the incoming lessee to prepare the land
and to sow, if he does not sustain any injury thereby.

Article 619 Sharecropping

Agricultural land and land planted with trees may be granted in sharecropping to a lessee in consideration of the
landowner taking a fixed share in the crop.

Article 620

In the absence of agreement or custom to the contrary, the conditions governing leases apply to sharecropping,
subject to the following provisions.

Article 621

The sharecropping is, when no term is fixed, deemed to have been granted for one yearly agricultural cycle.

Article 622

The lease in case of sharecropping includes agricultural tools and cattle belonging to the lessor which are on the
land at the time of contracting.

Article 623
1. The lessee must give to the cultivation and to the preservation of the crop the same care that he gives to
his own affairs.
2. The lessee is responsible for deterioration to the land during his enjoyment, unless he proves that he
looked after the preservation and maintenance of the land with the care of a reasonable person.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 90
3. The lessee is not bound to replace cattle that die or agricultural implements worn out through no fault of
his own.

Article 624
1. The produce is divided between the two parties in the proportion agreed upon or established by custom; in
default of agreement or custom the produce is divided equally.
2. Loss by reason of force majeure of all or part of the produce is borne equally by the two parties and gives
rise to no claim by either party against the other.

Article 625

In sharecropping, the lessee cannot assign the lease or sub-let the agricultural land without the consent of the
lessor.

Article 626

The sharecropping does not determine on the death of the lessor, but determines on the death of the lessee.

Article 627
1. When the sharecropping ceases before the end of its term, the lessor must reimburse the lessee or his heirs
for any expenditure made in respect of crops which have not ripened, and pay equitable compensation for
work that the lessee has done.
2. If, however, the sharecropping is dissolved by the death of the lessee, his heirs may, instead of claiming
reimbursement of the expenses herein before referred to, take the place of their principal until the crops
have ripened, provided they are in a position to continue the proper cultivation of the land.

Article 628 Lease of Waqf (Endowment) Property

1. A Nazir has the right to let Waqf property.
2. A beneficiary, even if he is the sole beneficiary, cannot grant a lease unless the right to do so has been
given to him by the constituent of the Waqf or unless he is authorized to do so by a person who has power
to grant a lease, whether he be the Nazir or the judge.

Article 629

The Nazir is the person entitled to receive the rent, and payment must not be made to the beneficiary without the
consent of the Nazir.

Article 630
1. The Nazir is not entitled to take the Waqf property or lease even at the current rent for similar properties.
2. The Nazir may lease Waqf property to his ascendants and descendants, provided that the rent is the
current rent for similar properties.

Article 631

A lease of Waqf property is not valid if the rent is grossly inadequate, unless the lessor is the sole beneficiary
with power to administer the Waqf. In such a case, the lease notwithstanding the gross inadequacy of the rent,
will bind the lessor, but will not bind beneficiaries who succeed him.

Article 632
1. In cases of lease of Waqf property, the estimation of the current rent for similar properties will be made at
the time of the conclusion of the contract of lease; any changes taking place after that date shall not be
taken into account.
2. When a Nazir grants a lease of Waqf property for a grossly inadequate rent, the lessee is bound, under

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 91
 penalty of termination of the contract, to make up the rent to the rent for similar properties.

Article 633
1. The Nazir cannot, without authority of the judge, lease Waqf property for a period exceeding three years,
even by successive contracts. Any lease entered into for a longer period shall be reduced to three years.
2. If, however, the Nazir is also either the founder or the sole beneficiary, he may, without it being necessary
to obtain the authority of the judge, lease the Waqf property for more than three years, subject to the right
of the Nazir succeeding him to claim the reduction of the period to three years.

Article 634

The provisions relating to lease apply to the lease of Waqf property, insofar as they are not incompatible with
the preceding provisions.

Section 2 Loan for Use

Article 635

A loan for use is a contract by which the lender undertakes to hand over to the borrower without valuable
consideration, a non-consumable thing for his use during a specific time or for a specific purpose, which thing
the borrower undertakes to restitute after having used it.

1. Obligations of the Lender

Article 636

The lender is bound to hand over to the borrower the thing lent in the condition in which it was at the time of the
conclusion of the contract of loan for use, and to leave him in possession of the thing lent during the period of
the contract.

Article 637
1. If, during the period of loan, the borrower is obliged to incur expenses necessary for the preservation of
the thing, the lender must reimburse him his expenses.
2. In the case of moneys usefully spent, the provisions with regard to expenses incurred by a possessor in
bad faith will be applicable.

Article 638
1. The lender does not warrant against the dispossession of the thing loaned unless there has been an
agreement for such warranty or the lender has deliberately concealed the cause of dispossession.
2. Similarly, the lender does not warrant against hidden defects. If, however, he has deliberately concealed
such defects, or has warranted that the thing is free from defects, he is bound to compensate the borrower
for any loss the borrower has suffered as a result thereof.

2. Obligations of the Borrower

Article 639
1. The borrower may only use the thing lent in the manner and to the extent provided for in the contract,
according to the nature of the thing, or in accordance with custom. He must not assign the use to a third
party, even gratuitously, without the authority of the lender.
2. The borrower is not responsible for changes to or deterioration of the thing lent resulting from its use in
accordance with the contract.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 92
Article 640
1. When the use of the thing lent entails expenses by the borrower, he will not have the right to claim the
refund thereof. He is bound to pay the necessary expenses for the normal maintenance of the thing.
2. The borrower may remove any additions that he has made to the thing lent, provided that he reinstates the
thing in its original condition.

Article 641
1. The borrower is bound to take such care for the preservation of the thing as he would take for the
preservation of his own property; provided that the care he takes is not less than that which a reasonable
person would take.
2. The borrower is, in any event, responsible for the loss of the thing lent arising from a fortuitous event or
force majeure if it was possible for him to avoid such loss by using his own property, or if he could only
preserve his own property or the thing lent and he preferred to preserve his own property.

Article 642
1. The borrower must, at the end of the loan, restitute the thing received in its state at that time, without
prejudice to his responsibility for loss or deterioration.
2. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the borrower must restitute the thing at the place that he
received it.

3. Termination of the Loan for Use

Article 643
1. The loan for use comes to an end upon the expiration of the term agreed and, in default of such term being
fixed, when the thing has served the purpose for which it was lent.
2. If there is no way by which the term of the loan for use can be fixed, the lender may demand its
termination at any time.
3. The borrower may, in all cases, restitute the thing lent before the end of the loan. If, however, such
restitution is prejudicial to the lender, he cannot be compelled to accept the thing.

Article 644

The lender may put an end to a loan for use at any time in the following cases:
a. If the lender has suddenly an urgent and unforeseen need of the thing.
b. If the borrower uses the thing improperly or neglects to take the necessary precautions for its preservation.
c. If the borrower becomes insolvent after the conclusion of the loan or if his insolvency before the
conclusion of the loan was not known to the lender.

Article 645

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, a loan for use ends upon the death of the borrower.

Chapter 2 Contracts for the Hire of Services

Section 1 Contracts for Work and Concessions for Public Utility Services

1. Contracts for Work

Article 646

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 93
By a contract for work one of the contracting parties undertakes to do a piece of work or to perform a service in
consideration of remuneration which the other contracting party undertakes to pay.

Article 647 Obligations of the Contractor

1. The contractor may undertake to supply his work only, the employer of the work being responsible for the
supply of materials which the contractor uses in or for the performance of his work.
2. The contractor may also undertake to supply the materials as well as his work.

Article 648

When the contractor undertakes to supply the whole or part of the materials to be used in the work, he is
responsible for and warrants their good quality to the employer.

Article 649
1. When the materials are supplied by the employer, the contractor is bound to care for their preservation, to
use them with technical skill, to account to the employer for their use in the work and return to him any
such materials that remain. If part of the materials becomes unfit for use owing to the contractor's neglect
or lack of professional skill, the contractor is bound to refund to the employer the value thereof.
2. In the absence of an agreement or trade custom to the contrary, the contractor shall provide, at his own
expense, the tools and accessory appliances necessary for the performance of the work.

Article 650
1. If, in the course of execution, it is established that the contractor is performing the work in a manner that
is defective or contrary to the agreement, the employer may formally summon him to alter, within a
reasonable period fixed by him, the manner in which he is performing the work. If after the expiration of
such a period the contractor fails to adopt the proper manner of working, the employer may either demand
termination of the contract or the handing over of the works to another contractor at the cost of the first
contractor, in accordance with the provisions of Article (209).
2. Immediate termination of the contract may, however, be demanded without it being necessary to grant any
delay, when rectification of the defective manner of performance is impossible.

Article 651
1. The architect and contractor are jointly and severally responsible for a period of ten years for the total or
partial demolition of constructions or other permanent works erected by them, even if such destruction is
due to a defect in the ground itself, and even if the employer authorized the erection of the defective
construction, unless, in this case, the constructions were intended by the parties to last for less than ten
years.
2. The warranty imposed by the preceding paragraph extends to defects in constructions and erections which
endanger the solidity and security of the works.
3. The period of ten years runs from the date of delivery of the works. This Article does not apply to the
rights of action which a contractor may have against his sub-contractors.

Article 652

An architect who only undertakes to prepare the plans without being entrusted with the supervision of their
execution, is responsible only for defects resulting from his plans.

Article 653

Any clause tending to exclude or restrict the warranty of the architect and the contractor is void.

Article 654

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 94
Actions on the warranties above referred to are prescribed after three years from the date of the destruction of
the works or the discovery of the defect.

Article 655 Obligations of the Employer

When the contractor completes the works and places them at the employer's disposal, the employer shall, as
soon as possible, take delivery in accordance with prevailing custom. When the employer, in spite of being
formally summoned, fails, without reasonable cause, to take delivery of the works, the works will be deemed to
have been delivered to him.

Article 656

In the absence of a custom or an agreement to the contrary the price is payable upon delivery of the works.

Article 657
1. When a contract is concluded in accordance with an estimate drawn up on a unit price basis and it
becomes apparent, during the course of the work, that it will be necessary, in order to complete the works
according to the agreed plan, considerably to exceed the estimated price, the contractor is bound to notify
the employer thereof forthwith and to inform him of the anticipated increase in price; if he fails to do so
he forfeits his right to recover the expenses incurred in excess of the estimate.
2. When the estimated excess in the price for the execution of the plans is considerable, the employer may
rescind the contract and stop the work, provided that he does so without delay and pays the contractor for
the cost of the work done by him, estimated in accordance with the terms of the contract, without being
liable to compensate the contractor for the profit he would have realized if he had completed the works.

Article 658
1. When a contract is concluded on a lump sum basis according to a plan agreed with the employer, the
contractor has no claim to an increase of price, even if modifications and additions are made to the plan,
unless such modifications or additions are due to the fault of the employer, or have been authorized by the
employer and the price thereof agreed with the contractor.
2. Such agreement should be made in writing unless the principal contract was concluded verbally.
3. The contractor has no claim to an increase of price on the grounds of an increase in the price of raw
materials, labor or any other item of expenditure, even if such increase is so great as to render the
performance of the contract onerous.
4. When, however, as a result of exceptional events of a general character which could not be foreseen at the
time the contract was concluded, the economic equilibrium between the respective obligations of the
employer and of the contractor breaks down, and the basis on which the financial estimates for the
contract were computed has consequently disappeared, the judge may grant an increase of the price or
order the termination of the contract.

Article 659

When the price has not been fixed in advance, it must be calculated according to the value of the work and the
expenses of the contractor.

Article 660
1. An architect is entitled to a separate fee for the preparation of the plans and specifications and another for
the supervision of the work.
2. If these fees are not specified in the contract, they shall be fixed according to prevailing custom.
3. If, however, the work is not completed in conformity with the plans prepared by the architect, the fee shall
be assessed on the basis of the time taken in their preparation, taking into consideration the nature of the
work.

Article 661 Sub-contracts

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 95
1. A contractor may entrust the execution of the whole or part of the work to a sub-contractor, unless he is
precluded from so doing by a clause in the contract, or unless the nature of the work presupposes reliance
on his personal skill.
2. In such a case the contractor remains responsible to the employer for his sub-contractor.

Article 662
1. Sub-contractors and workmen working for a contractor in the execution of a contract have a direct right of
action against the employer but only to the extent of such sums as are due by the employer to the main
contractor on the date that action is commenced. Workmen of sub-contractors likewise have the same
right of action against the main contractor and the employer.
2. In the case of an attachment served by one of them upon the employer or the main contractor, workmen
have a right of concession on the sums due to the main contractor or to the sub-contractor at the time of
the attachment, in proportion to the amount due to each of them. These sums may be paid to them directly.
3. The rights of sub-contractors and workmen provided for in this Article have priority over those of a
person to whom the contractor has assigned sums due to him by the employer.

Article 663 Termination of a Contract for Work

1. A employer may terminate the contract and stop the work at any time before the completion of the works,
provided that he compensates the contractor for all expenses he has incurred, for the work that he has
done and the profit that he would have made if he had completed the work.
2. The court may, however, reduce the compensation due to the contractor for loss of profit if the
circumstances justify such reduction. In particular, the court shall deduct from such compensation any
saving realized by the contractor as a result of the rescission of the contract by the employer and any
profit which the contractor could have made by employing his time otherwise.

Article 664

A contract for work comes to an end if the performance of the work for which the contract was concluded
becomes impossible.

Article 665
1. When works are destroyed by a fortuitous event, before delivery to the employer, the contractor has no
claim either for the price of his work, or for reimbursement of his expenses. The loss of materials falls on
the party who supplied them.
2. When, however, the contractor fails to comply with a formal summons to deliver the works or when the
works are destroyed or deteriorate before delivery by the fault of the contractor, he is under a liability to
indemnify the employer for the materials supplied to carry out the works.
3. When the employer is formally summoned to take delivery of the works or when the works are destroyed
or deteriorate by the fault of the employer or by reason of a defect in the materials supplied by him, the
employer shall bear the loss resulting from the destruction of the materials and is liable to the contractor
for his remuneration in addition to such compensation when necessary.

Article 666

A contract for work is dissolved by the death of the contractor if his personal skill was taken into account when
the contract was concluded. If such personal skill was not taken into account, the contractor is not ipso facto
dissolved and the employer may not, except in cases in which Article (663) applies, terminate the contract,
unless the contractor's heirs do not offer sufficient guarantees for the due performance of the work.

Article 667
1. When the contract is dissolved by the death of the contractor, the employer is bound to pay to the
contractor's estate the value of the work already done and expenses incurred for the execution of the work
which has not been completed, to the extent of the benefit that he derives from such work and expenses.
2. The employer may, on the other hand, demand delivery, against payment of an equitable compensation, of
the materials prepared and plans whose execution has been commenced.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 96
3. These provisions also apply when the contractor who has commenced the work becomes unable to
complete it owing to a cause beyond his control.

2. Concessions of Public Utility Services

Article 668

A concession of a public utility service is a contract whose object is the management of a public utility service
of an economic nature. Such a contract is concluded between the administrative authority in charge of the
organization of such a service and a private person or company to whom the exploitation of the service is
entrusted for a fixed period.

Article 669

The obligor of a public utility service undertakes, by the contract concluded between him and the consumer, to
provide the latter in a normal manner with the services corresponding to the rates which he collects, in
accordance with the conditions stipulated in the contract of concession and its annexes and also with the
conditions which the nature of the work and the laws applicable thereto demand.

Article 670
1. When the obligor of the public utility service enjoys a de jure or de facto monopoly service, he is bound to
observe strict equality between consumers both as regards the services rendered and the rates charged.
2. The principle of equality does not exclude special treatment involving the reduction or remittance of rates,
provided such treatment is granted to all persons who apply for same and who fulfill the general
conditions laid down by the obligor. The principle of equality entails, however, the prohibition of the
obligor from granting to some consumers advantages which he refuses to grant to others.
3. Any discrimination granted contrary to the provisions of the preceding paragraph renders the obligor
liable to compensation for the loss which may be caused, as a result of such discrimination to third parties,
by the disturbance of the natural balance of fair competition.

Article 671
1. The rates laid down by a public authority will have force of law with regard to contracts entered into
between the obligor and consumers; the parties shall not have the right to depart therefrom by agreement.
2. The rates may be revised or modified. If the rates are modified and such modification is approved, the
new rate becomes applicable, but without retroactive effect, from the date fixed for its coming into force
by the approval decision. Any contracts in effect (subscriptions) at the time of modification of the rates
will be subject to the increase or reduction of charges for the period of the contract unexpired at the date
of coming into force of the new rates.

Article 672
1. Any irregularity or mistake in the application of the rates to individual contracts is subject to rectification.
2. If the irregularity or mistake operates to the detriment of the consumer, he shall be entitled to recover the
amount paid in excess of the authorized charge. If such an irregularity or mistake operates to the detriment
of the obligor of the public utility service, he shall be entitled to collect an amount to make up the
authorized charge. Any agreement to the contrary is void. The right of recovery in either case is barred by
prescription after one year from the date when the collection of the incorrect charge took place.

Article 673
1. Consumers, in the case of concessions for the distribution of water, gas, electricity, power or other similar
commodities, must support interruptions or irregularities for a short time to which installations of such
services are normally subject, such as those necessary for the upkeep of the installation with which the
service is maintained.
2. The obligor of these services may repudiate responsibility in respect of interruptions or irregularities of
abnormal length or gravity, by proving that they are caused by "force majeure" not imputable to the

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 97
 operation of the service, or by a fortuitous event which could not have been foreseen or whose
consequences could not have been avoided by any vigilant management acting without undue regard to
economy. A strike constitutes a fortuitous event if the obligor establishes that it took place without any
fault on his part and that it was not possible for him to replace strikers by other workmen or to avoid the
consequences of their strike by any other means.

Section 2 Employment Contract

Article 674

An employment contract is one whereby one of the contracting parties undertakes to work in the service and
under the supervision or control of the other contracting party in consideration of a remuneration which such
other party undertakes to pay.

Article 675
1. The provisions contained in this Section apply only insofar as they are not expressly or impliedly
inconsistent with special laws relating to service.
2. Such special laws define the categories of workers to which the provisions of this Section do not apply.

Article 676
1. The provisions of employment contract shall apply to the relationship between employers and canvassers,
commercial representatives, commercial travelers, assurance agents and other intermediaries, even if they
are remunerated on a commission basis or if they work for the account of several employers at the same
time, so long as these persons work under the orders and supervision of such employers.
2. When the services of a commercial representative or a commercial traveler come to an end, even by
reason of the expiration of the term of employment specified in the contract, he shall be entitled to
receive, by way of remuneration, the commission or discount, agreed upon or established by custom, on
orders which do not reach the employer until after the commercial representative or the traveler has left
his service, if such orders are the direct result of the employee's representations (demarches) to customers
while he was in the employer's service. Such employees, however, can only claim this right during the
usual period for such claims established by custom in respect of each business.

1- Elements of a Contract

Article 677

In the absence of provisions to the contrary in law or in administrative regulations, an employment contract is
not required to be in any special form.

Article 678
1. An employment contract may be concluded either for a specific service or for a fixed period; it may also
be entered into for an indefinite duration.
2. If an employment contract is entered into for the lifetime of the worker or the employer or for a period
longer than five years, the worker, after the expiration of five years, may resiliate the contract without
being liable to pay compensation, provided that he gives six months prior notice to the employer.

Article 679
1. When an employment contract is entered into for a fixed period, it, ipso facto, comes to an end at the
expiration of the term.
2. If the parties continue to carry out the contract after the expiration of the term, the contract will be deemed
to have been renewed for an indefinite duration.

Article 680

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 98
1. When a contract is entered into for the performance of a specific work, it comes to an end when the
agreed work has been completed.
2. When the work is, by its nature, capable of being renewed and the contract is continued after the
completion of the work agreed, the contract will be deemed to have been impliedly renewed for the period
necessary for the execution of the same work a second time.

Article 681

The performance of services is presumed to be made for remuneration, if it is not customary for such services to
be performed gratuitously or if such services come within the scope of the profession of the person who
performs them.

Article 682
1. When an employment contract for an individual or a group of individuals or factory regulations do not
specify the salary payable by the employer, the salary will be fixed in accordance with the rates, if any,
applicable to work of a similar nature. If no rates exist, the salary will be fixed in accordance with the
custom of the trade and the custom of the place where the work is performed. If there is no such custom,
the judge will fix the salary in accordance with equity.
2. The same rules will apply to determine the nature and the extent of the work to be performed by the
employee.

Article 683

The following sums form an integral part of an employee's salary and are taken into account in computing the
attachable portion thereof:
1. Commissions payable to canvassers, commercial travelers and commercial representatives.
2. Percentages payable to employees of commercial establishments on the price of sales effected by them
and high cost of living allowances paid to them.
3. Any gratuity paid to a worker in addition to his salary, as well as fidelity bonuses, family allowances and
other similar allowances, if payment of such sums is provided for in the individual employment contract
or in the workshop regulations, or if these sums are customarily payable so that the worker regards such
sums as forming part of his salary and not constituting a bounty, and provided that the amount of such
payments is known before the attachment is made.

Article 684
1. Tips are deemed to be salary only in industries or trades where it is customary to pay tips and where tips
are subject to regulations by which they can be controlled.
2. Tips are deemed to form part of the employee's salary when the amounts given as tips by customers of a
particular commercial establishment to the employees are collected in a common fund for distribution to
the workers by or under the supervision of the employer.
3. In some industries, such as hotels, restaurants, cafes, and bars, a worker's salary may consist solely of the
tips he receives and the food he consumes.

2- Effects of a Contract The Obligations of the Worker:

Article 685

The worker shall:

a. Personally perform the work and in so doing use the care of a reasonable person.
b. Obey the orders of the employer relating to the performance of the agreed work and coming within the
duties of the worker, if such orders are not contrary to the contract, to law or to morality, and if obedience
thereto does not entail danger.
c. Preserve with care things entrusted to him for the performance of his work.
d. Safeguard the industrial or commercial secrets of the work, even after the end of the contract.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 99
Article 686
1. When the work entrusted to the worker enables him to know the clients of the employer or to learn the
secrets of his business, the parties may agree that the worker will not be entitled, after the termination of
the contract, to compete with the employer or participate in a competitive undertaking.
2. In order, however, that any such agreement be valid, it is necessary:
a. That the worker has attained his majority at the time the contract is entered into.
b. That the restriction be limited as to time, place and kind of work, to the extent necessary for the
protection of the legitimate interests of the employer.
3. The employer cannot avail himself of such an agreement if he terminates the contract or refuses to renew
it, without the worker giving him adequate grounds for such action; nor can the employer avail himself of
such agreement if he himself has given the worker adequate grounds to terminate the contract.

Article 687

When the contract contains a penalty clause applicable in the event of the breach of a condition in restrain of
competition, and such a clause is so onerous as to be tantamount to pressure on the worker to compel him to
remain in the service of the employer for a longer time than that agreed, both the penalty clause and the
condition in restraint of competition will be void.

Article 688
1. When the worker discovers a new invention while in the service of the employer, the employer will have
no rights in respect of the invention, even if the worker has discovered the invention by reason of the work
performed in the service of the employer.
2. An invention discovered by a worker in the course of his work belongs, however, to the employer, if the
nature of the work that the worker has undertaken to carry out requires him to give his time to invention or
if the employer has expressly stipulated in the contract that he will have the right to inventions discovered
by the worker.
3. If the invention is of serious economic importance, the worker may, in cases falling within the preceding
paragraph, demand a special remuneration to be fixed in accordance with the principles of equity, taking
into account in the assessment of such remuneration the extent of help supplied by the employer and the
use the worker has made of the employer's installations for the purpose of the invention.

Article 689

In addition to the obligations laid down in the preceding articles, an employee must carry out obligations
imposed upon him by special laws.

Article 690 The Obligations of Employer

The employer must pay the worker his salary at the time and place agreed upon in the contract or established by
custom, subject to the provisions in this connection contained in special laws.

Article 691
1. When a contract provides that the worker will be entitled, in addition to or in lieu of the agreed salary, to a
share of the employer's profits or to a percentage of the gross receipts or of the amount of the production
or of the value of the savings effected, or to other remuneration of a like nature, the employer is bound to
render to the worker, after each balance sheet, an account of the amount payable to him in this respect.
2. The employer must, in addition, supply the worker, or a trustworthy person designated by the parties or by
the judge, with the information necessary to verify the accuracy of such account and allow him to consult
his books for this purpose.

Article 692

When a workman or an employee comes to perform a day's work as stipulated in his contract of service, or
declares his readiness to perform a day's work and is only prevented from so doing by a cause imputable to the

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 100
employer, he is entitled to his salary for the day.

Article 693

In addition to the obligations laid down in the preceding articles, the employer is bound to carry out the
obligations imposed on him by special laws.

Article 694 Expiration of Employment Contract

1. Without prejudice to the provisions of Articles (678) and (679), an employment contract ends at the
expiration of the term fixed or upon the completion of the work in respect of which the contract was
entered into.
2. When the duration of the contract is not fixed either by the agreement or by the nature of the work or by
its object, each of the contracting parties may terminate his relationship with the other party; the exercise
of this right must be preceded by notice, the manner and period of which are defined by special laws.

Article 695
1. When a contract entered into for an indefinite period is terminated by one of the parties without observing
the delay required for notice or before the end of this delay, he is bound to compensate the other party for
the whole period of the notice or for the portion thereof still to run. Subject to the provisions of special
laws on the subject, such compensation will include, in addition to the fixed salary due for this period, all
additional remuneration, provided the amount of such remuneration is fixed and defined.
2. When the contract is terminated unfairly by one of the contracting parties, the other party may, in addition
to the compensation due owing to failure to observe the delay required for notice, claim damages for the
prejudice resulting from the unjustified termination of the contract. Discharge is deemed to be unjustified
if it takes place as a result of the service of an attachment on the employer or on account of debts
contracted by the worker to third parties.

Article 696
1. Compensation on dismissal may be granted, even though the employer has not himself dismissed the
worker, if the employer, by his own actions and especially vexatious treatment or by a breach of the
conditions of contract, has obliged the worker to appear to have terminated the contract himself.
2. The transfer of a worker, without fault on his part, to a less profitable or less suitable post than that which
he is occupying, is not deemed to be an indirect vexatious act if such transfer is necessary in the interests
of the work. The transfer will, however, be deemed a vexatious act if it is made with the object of injuring
the worker.

Article 697
1. An employment contract is not dissolved by the death of the employer, unless the personality of the
employer was a factor taken into consideration in concluding the contract. The contract, however, is
dissolved by the death of the worker.
2. The rules laid down in special laws on the subject will be observed for the dissolution of the contract on
account of death or prolonged illness of the worker or of any other cause constituting force majeure which
prevents the worker from continuing his work.

Article 698
1. Actions arising out of an employment contract are prescribed after one year from the time of the
termination of the contract; but in the case of actions arising out of commission and profit sharing and
percentage of gross receipts, the period of prescription only begins from the time when the employer
hands to the worker a statement of what is due to him according to the last balance sheet.
2. Actions in connection with the disclosure of trade secrets or the enforcement of conditions of contract as
to the protection of such secrets, are not subject to this special limitation.

Section 3 Agency

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 101
1. The Elements of Agency

Article 699

Agency is a contract whereby an agent binds himself to perform a legal act on behalf of a principal.

Article 700

In the absence of any provision of the law to the contrary, an Agency must be executed in the same form as that
required for the execution of the juridical act in respect of which the Agency is given.

Article 701
1. An Agency given in general terms, which does not specify the nature of the juridical act in respect of
which it is given, only confers on the agent the power to perform acts of management.
2. Granting of leases of not more than three years duration, acts of preservation and of maintenance, the
recovery of rights and discharge of debts, are deemed to be acts of management. All acts of disposition
necessary for management, as the sale of perishable crops, goods or movables, and the purchase of things
necessary for the preservation and exploitation of the thing constituting the object of the Agency are
deemed to be acts of management.

Article 702
1. A special Agency, in respect of any act which is not an act of management, is required, and in particular
for a sale, a mortgage, a gift, a compromise, an admission, an arbitration, the tendering of an oath and
representation before the courts.
2. A special Agency to carry out a certain category of juridical acts is valid, save as regards gratuitous acts,
even though the object of such acts is not specified.
3. A special Agency only confers on the agent a power to act in matters specified therein and in matters
necessarily incidental thereto in accordance with the nature of each matter and prevailing custom.

2. The Effects of an Agency

Article 703
1. The agent is bound to perform the Agency without exceeding the limits fixed therein.
2. He may, however, exceed these limits if he finds himself unable to notify the principal thereof beforehand
and if the circumstances are such that it can be assumed that the principal could not have failed to approve
the act. In such a case, the agent is bound to inform the principal immediately that he has exceeded the
limits of Agency.

Article 704
1. If the Agency is gratuitous, the agent must exercise in its performance the degree of care that he gives to
his own affairs, without, however, being bound to exercise more diligence than a reasonable man.
2. When the Agency is given for remuneration, the agent must always exercise in its performance the
diligence of a reasonable man.

Article 705

An agent is bound to give to his principal all necessary information in connection with the execution of his
Agency and render him an account thereof.

Article 706

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 102
1. The agent may not use the property of the principal for his own benefit.
2. He is liable for interest on sums used by him for his own benefit from the moment when he commences to
use them. He is also liable for interest on sums that he owes the principal from the time when he is served
with a formal summons.

Article 707
1. When several agents are appointed, they are jointly and severally liable if the Agency is indivisible or if
the damage sustained by the principal is the result of their common fault. Agents, however, even if joint
and several, are not responsible for the acts done by their co-agents in excess of the limits of the Agency
or by a wrongful use of the Agency.
2. When several agents are appointed by the same document without being authorized to act severally, they
must act jointly except in cases where an exchange of views is not essential, such as receiving a payment
or paying a debt.

Article 708
1. An agent who nominates a substitute to perform his Agency without being authorized to do so, is
responsible for the acts of the substitute as if they were his own acts: in such a case, the agent and his
substitute are jointly and severally responsible.
2. When an agent is authorized to appoint a substitute without specifying the person, he is only liable for a
faulty choice of the substitute or for faulty instructions that he gives to him.
3. In the two preceding cases, the principal and the substitute of the agent have a direct right of action
against each other.

Article 709
1. An Agency is deemed to be gratuitous in the absence of agreement which may be express or result by
implication from the position of the agent.
2. When the remuneration is agreed, it is still subject to the assessment of the judge, unless it has been
voluntarily paid after the performance of the Agency.

Article 710

Whatever result the agent may have achieved in the performance of the Agency, the principal must repay to the
agent any expenses incurred by him for the normal performance of the Agency with interest from the date when
such expenses were incurred. When the performance of the Agency requires the principal to supply to the agent
sums of money for expenditure in respect of the Agency, the principal must advance such amounts, if requested
by the agent so to do.

Article 711

The principal is responsible for injury sustained by the agent, without fault on his part, in the normal
performance of the Agency.

Article 712

When several persons appoint a sole agent for a common purpose, they are, in the absence of agreement to the
contrary, jointly liable to the agent regarding the performance of the Agency.

Article 713

Articles (104) to (107), with regard to representation, apply to the relationship of a principal and of an agent
with third parties dealing with the agent.

Article 714 Termination of an Agency

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 103
The Agency comes to an end by the completion of the work or by the expiration of the period for which it was
given and by the death of the principal or of the agent.

Article 715
1. The principal may, at any time and notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary, revoke or restrict the
Agency. When, however, the Agency is remunerated, the principal must indemnify the agent for loss
sustained by him as a result of an intempestive or unjustified revocation.
2. When, however, the Agency has been given in the interests of an agent or of a third party, the principal is
not entitled to revoke or restrict the Agency without the consent of the person in whose interest the
Agency was granted.

Article 716
1. The agent may, at any time and notwithstanding an agreement to the contrary, renounce his Agency.
Renunciation is effected by notification to the principal. When the Agency is remunerated, the agent must
indemnify the principal for loss sustained by him as a result of his renunciation, if it is intempestive or
unjustified.
2. The agent, however, has not the right to renounce an Agency given in the interests of a third party, unless
there are serious reasons justifying such renunciation and unless he notifies the third party and gives him
time to take such action as may be necessary to safeguard his interests.

Article 717
1. The agent is bound, irrespective of the manner in which the Agency is terminated, to carry through any
work he has commenced to such a condition that it is not exposed to deterioration.
2. When the Agency is extinguished by the death of the agent, his heirs, if they have the necessary legal
competence and knowledge of the Agency, are bound to inform the principal immediately of the death of
the agent and to take such steps as circumstances demand in the principal's interests.

Section 4 Contract of Bailment

Article 718

Bailment is a contract whereby one person agrees to take delivery from another person of a thing which he
undertakes to keep in safe custody and return in kind.

1- The Obligations of Bailee

Article 719
1. The Bailee is bound to take delivery of the thing deposited.
2. He is not entitled to make use of the thing deposited without the express or implied permission from the
Bailor.

Article 720
1. When the bailment is gratuitous, the Bailee is bound to exercise, in the custody of the thing, the care
which he employs in his own affairs, without, however, being bound to exercise a degree of diligence
exceeding that of a reasonable person.
2. When the bailment is for remuneration, the Bailee must exercise in the custody of the thing deposited the
diligence of a reasonable person.

Article 721

The Bailee may not, without the express permission from the Bailor, appoint a substitute to take over the
custody of the thing deposited, unless he is compelled to do so by reason of urgent and absolute necessity.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 104
Article 722

The Bailee is bound to return the thing deposited as soon as he is required so to do by the Bailor, unless it
follows from the contract that the term of the deposit was fixed in the interests of the Bailee. The Bailee may, at
any time, compel the Bailor to take back the thing deposited, unless if follows from the contract that the term of
the deposit was fixed in the interests of the Bailor.

Article 723

When the heir of a Bailee sells the thing deposited in good faith, he is only liable to refund to the owner the
price which he has received or to assign to the owner his rights against the purchaser. If the alienation was
gratuitous, he is liable to pay the value of the thing deposited at the time of alienation.

2- The Obligations of Bailor

Article 724

A bailment is originally gratuitous. When, however, remuneration is stipulated, the Bailor, in the absence of
agreement to the contrary, is bound to pay such remuneration at the time the deposit ends.

Article 725

A Bailor must repay the Bailee any expenses incurred for the safekeeping of the thing deposited and indemnify
him against any loss he may incur as a result of the deposit.

3- Certain Kinds of Bailment

Article 726

When the object of the bailment is a sum of money or another thing of a consumable nature and the Bailee has
been authorized to make use of it, the contract is deemed to be a contract of loan for consumption.

Article 727
1. Proprietors of hotels, inns or other similar establishments are responsible, in the performance of their
obligation to keep safely the effects brought in by travelers and residents, even for the acts of casual
frequenters of their establishments.
2. They are, however, liable, as regards sums of money, securities and articles of value, only up to a limit of
50 L.E., unless they have undertaken the safe custody of such things knowing their value, or unless they
have refused, without just cause, to take them in their charge, or if the loss has been caused by their gross
negligence or by the gross negligence of one of their staff.

Article 728
1. A traveler must, as soon as he has knowledge of the theft, loss of, or damage to the thing, inform the
proprietor of the hotel or the innkeeper, under pain, in the case of unjustifiable delay, of forfeiture of his
rights.
2. His right of action against the hotel proprietor or innkeeper is prescribed after six months from the date of
his leaving the hotel or the inn.

Section 5 Custodianship

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 105
Article 729

Custodianship is a contract whereby the parties entrust to a third party a movable or an immovable or a property
comprising both movables or immovables which is the subject of litigation or of legal rights that have not been
established, which such third party undertakes to safeguard, manage and return, together with fruits collected
thereon, to the person whose right thereto shall be established.

Article 730

The court may order Custodianship:

1. In the cases provided for in the preceding article, when the parties concerned do not agree to the custody
2. When a party with an interest in a movable or an immovable has reasonable grounds to fear imminent
danger to the property as a result of its remaining in the hands of its possessor.
3. In other cases provided for by law.

Article 731

Custodianship of Waqf property may be ordered in the following cases:

1. when the office of nazir is vacant or in the event of litigation between co-nazirs or between persons
claiming to have a right to the office of nazir, or when there is an action for the removal of the nazir,
provided it is established that the judicial deposit is an indispensable measure in order to safeguard the
contingent rights of the interested parties. In such a case the deposit ends upon the appointment of a nazir
to the Waqf, whether such appointment is provisional or final.
2. When the Waqf is in debt.
3. when one of the beneficiaries of the Waqf is an insolvent debtor. The deposit will be ordered in respect of
his share alone, if such share can be isolated even by means of a provisional partition, and, if not, the
deposit will be ordered in respect of all the property of the Waqf; in both cases the deposit will only be
ordered if it is the only means of protecting the rights of the creditors against the wrongful administration
or bad faith of the nazir.

Article 732

The appointment of a Custodian, whether by agreement or judicially, must be made with the unanimous consent
of all the interested parties. Failing such consent, the Custodian will be appointed by the judge.

Article 733

The obligations of the Custodian, his rights and powers, are defined in the agreement or in the judgment
ordering the deposit. In the absence of such definition, the provisions relating to deposit and to Agency will
apply in so far as they do not conflict with the following provisions.

Article 734
1. A Custodian is bound to ensure the preservation and administration of the property entrusted to him with
the diligence of a reasonable person.
2. A Custodian may not, either directly or indirectly, appoint one of the interested parties in his place to
carry out the whole or part of his mission, without the consent of the other parties.

Article 735

Apart from administrative acts, a Custodian must not act without the consent of all interested parties or the
authority of the court.

Article 736

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 106
A Custodian may be remunerated unless he has renounced all remuneration.

Article 737
1. A Custodian must keep regular books of account. The judge may order his books to be stamped by the
court.
2. He is bound to render to the interested parties, at least once each year, an account of the receipts and
expenditure with supporting vouchers. If the Custodian is appointed by the court, he must also deposit a
copy of his account at the court's registry.

Article 738
1. The deposit comes to an end either by agreement of all the interested parties or by decision of the court.
2. The Custodian must then forthwith restitute the property entrusted to him to the person chosen by the
interested parties or designated by the judge.

Chapter 4 Aleatory Contracts

Section 1 Gambling and Betting

Article 739
1. Any agreement relating to a game of chance or a bet is void.
2. A person who loses in a game of chance or on a bet may, notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary,
reclaim what he has paid within three years from the time when he made the payment. He may prove such
payment by all available means.

Article 740
1. Bets between persons taking part personally in sports are excepted from the provisions of the preceding
Article. The judge may, nevertheless, reduce the stake if excessive.
2. Legally authorized lotteries are also excepted.

Section 2 Life Annuities

Article 741
1. A person may for valuable consideration or gratuitously bind himself to pay another person periodical
payments during his lifetime.
2. This obligation may be created either by contract or by will.

Article 742
1. A life annuity may be granted for the life of the beneficiary of the grantor or of a third party.
2. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, a life annuity is presumed to have been settled for the
duration of the beneficiary's life.

Article 743

Subject to the requirements of the law as to the form of contracts for gifts, a contract providing for an annuity is
valid only if made in writing.

Article 744

A stipulation in the contract that a life annuity is not attachable is only valid when the life annuity is settled
gratuitously.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 107
Article 745
1. A beneficiary is only entitled to the annuity for the number of days for which the person on whose life the
annuity has been settled.
2. When, however, it is provided that the annuity is payable in advance, the beneficiary will be entitled to the
installment which has fallen due.

Article 746

If the grantor does not fulfill his obligation, the beneficiary may demand due performance of the contract. He
may also, if the contract is for valuable consideration, apply for the termination of the contract together with
such damages as may be due.

Section 3 Contract of Insurance

1- General Provisions

Article 747

Insurance is a contract whereby the insurer undertakes, in consideration of a premium or any other pecuniary
payment, to pay to the assured or the beneficiary for whose benefit the insurance is contracted, a sum of money
or an annuity or any other pecuniary thing upon the occurrence of the event or the risk specified in the contract.

Article 748

Provisions relating to insurance contracts, which are not mentioned in this Code, are regulated by special laws.

Article 749

Any lawful economic interest which a person may have in the non-occurrence of a specified risk may be the
subject of insurance.

Article 750

The following conditions in a policy of insurance are void:

1. A condition providing for the forfeiture of the right to the benefit of the insurance on account of a breach
of the law or of regulations, unless such breach constitutes a crime or a deliberate misdemeanor.
2. A condition providing for the forfeiture of the rights of the assured on account of his delay in notifying the
authorities of the occurrence of the risk insured or in producing documents, if it appears from the
circumstances that there was a reasonable excuse for the delay.
3. Any printed condition relating to cases involving nullity or forfeiture, which is not shown in a clear
manner.
4. Any arbitration condition included in the general printed conditions of the policy and not as a special
agreement distinct from the general conditions.
5. Any other clause of an arbitrary nature, the breach whereof appears to have no bearing on the occurrence
of the event insured against.

Article 751

The insurer shall only be bound to indemnify the assured for the actual loss arising as a result of the occurrence
of the risk insured against, to the extent of the amount insured.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 108
Article 752
a. Actions arising out of insurance contracts shall be barred by limitation after the expiration of three years
from the date of the occurrence which gave rise to such actions.
b. This period, however, shall only run:
c. In the event of concealment of particulars or of a false or inexact declaration of particulars, in respect of
the risk insured against, from the day when the insurer had knowledge thereof.
d. In the event of the occurrence of the risk insured against, from the date when the interested parties had
knowledge thereof.

Article 753

Any agreement contrary to the provisions of this Section shall be void unless such agreement is in favor of the
assured or of the beneficiary.

2- Certain Classes of Insurance

Article 754 Life Insurance

Sums which the insurer undertakes to pay, in the case of life assurance, to the assured or to the beneficiary,
upon the occurrence of the event insured against or on the maturity date stipulated in the assurance policy, shall
become due from the time of occurrence of the event or upon maturity, without it being necessary to establish
that the assured or the beneficiary suffered any loss.

Article 755
1. The assurance of the life of a third party is void unless such third party consents thereto in writing prior to
the issue of the policy. If such third party is under legal incapacity, the contract will not be valid unless
consented to by his legal representative.
2. Such consent is also necessary for the validity of the assignment of the right to the benefit under the
assurance or for the validity of a mortgage on such a right.

Article 756
1. The insurer is released from the obligation to pay the sum assured if the life assured commits suicide. The
insurer shall, however, be bound to pay to the persons to whom the right reverts a sum equal to the
amount of the insurance reserve.
2. When suicide is due to an illness whereby the patient lost control of his actions, the obligation of the
insurer remains in its entirety. It is for the insurer to establish that the life assured died as a result of
suicide and for the beneficiary to establish that the life assured had, at the time he committed suicide, lost
control of his actions.
3. When an assurance policy contains a clause by which the insurer is bound to pay the sum assured even if
the suicide was committed voluntarily and knowingly by the life assured, such a clause is only
enforceable if suicide was committed after two years from the date of the contract.

Article 757
1. When an assurance is taken out on the life of a person other than the assured, the insurer is released from
his obligations if the assured deliberately causes the death of the life assured or if the death occurs at his
instigation.
2. When a life assurance is taken out in favor of a person other than the assured, such other person shall not
benefit from the assurance if he has deliberately caused the death of the life assured or if such death
occurred at his instigation. In the case of an attempted homicide, the assured shall have the right to
substitute another person for the beneficiary even if the beneficiary had already accepted the insurance
benefit stipulated in his favor.

Article 758

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 109
1. It may be agreed in life assurance that the sum assured shall be paid either to persons nominated or to
persons to be nominated at a later date by the assured.
2. The assurance shall be deemed to have been made in favor of nominated beneficiaries if the assured stated
in the contract that the assurance was made in favor of his spouse or his children or descendants, born or
to be born, or of his heirs without referring to them by name. Should the assurance be contracted in favor
of the heirs without their being named, such heirs shall be entitled to the sum assured in proportion to their
respective shares in the inheritance. This right will devolve on them even if they renounce their
inheritance.
3. By spouse is meant the person proved to have such capacity at the time of the death of the assured, and by
children are meant the descendants proved to have the right to inherit at that time.

Article 759

An assured who has undertaken to pay periodical premiums may release himself from the contract at any time
by written notice sent to the insurer prior to the expiration of the current period. In such event he shall be
released from payment of subsequent premiums.

Article 760
1. In whole life contracts which do not contain a condition that the assured shall remain alive for a specified
period and in all contracts providing for payment of the sum assured after a specified number of years, the
assured may, after payment of at least three yearly premiums and notwithstanding any agreement to the
contrary, convert the original policy into a paid up policy against a reduction of the sum assured. This
provision is subject to the condition that the event insured against is bound to occur.
2. Life assurance, if temporary, shall not be subject to reduction.

Article 761

Should the assurance be reduced, the reduction shall not exceed the following limits:
a. in whole life contracts, the reduced sum assured shall not be less than the amount to which the assured
would have been entitled if he had paid an amount equal to the assurance reserve on the date of the
reduction, less 1% of the original sum assured, as if this sum had constituted a single premium payable in
respect of an assurance of the same nature calculated according to the rates on the basis of which the
original contract of assurance was concluded.
b. in contracts in which it is agreed that payment of the sum assured will be made after a certain number of
years, the reduced sum assured shall not be less than a fraction of the original sum assured calculated
proportionately to the premiums paid.

Article 762
1. The assured may also, after payment of at least three yearly premiums, surrender the policy, provided that
the event insured against is bound to occur.
2. A temporary assurance contract is not subject to surrender.

Article 763

Conditions relating to reduction and surrender are deemed to form part of the general conditions of the
assurance and should be inserted in the policy.

Article 764
1. Neither incorrect particulars nor misstatements as to the age of the life assured shall render the assurance
void, unless the true age of the life assured exceeds the limit specified in the table of rates.
2. In all other cases, if, as a result of incorrect particulars or misstatements, the premium agreed upon is less
than the premium which should have been paid, the sum assured shall be reduced in the proportion that
the agreed premium bears to the premiums which should be paid on the basis of the true age.
3. Should, however, the agreed premium be higher than the premium which should have been paid on the
basis of the true age of the life assured, the insurer shall be bound to refund, without interest, the excess
received by him and to reduce the subsequent premiums to the limit corresponding to the true age of the

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 110
 life assured.

Article 765

In life assurance, the insurer who has paid the sum assured shall not be entitled to be subrogated to the rights of
the assured or of the beneficiary against the person who caused the event insured against or against the person
responsible for same.

Article 766 Fire Insurance

1. In insurance against fire, the insurer is liable for all damage resulting from fire or the beginning of a fire
which may become an actual fire, or from the risk of a fire which may occur.
2. His liability is not limited solely to damage resulting directly from the fire but also includes damage
which is necessarily the result of the fire and particularly damage caused to things covered by the
insurance by reason of salvage measures or of measures to prevent the extension of the fire.
3. Notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary, the insurer is also liable for the loss or disappearance of
the things covered by the insurance, occurring during the fire, unless he can establish that this was
occasioned by theft.

Article 767

An insurer guarantees compensation for all damage resulting from fire, even if the fire broke out owing to a
defect in the thing insured.

Article 768
1. An insurer is liable for damage resulting from the unintentional fault of the insured and also for any
damage resulting from a fortuitous event or force majeure.
2. An insurer is not, however, responsible for losses and damage caused deliberately or fraudulently by the
insured, notwithstanding any agreement to the contrary.

Article 769

An insurer is liable for damage caused by persons for whose acts the insured is responsible, whatever may be
the nature or extent of their fault.

Article 770
1. Should the thing insured be encumbered with a pledge, mortgage or other real warranty, these rights will
be transferred to the compensation due to the debtor by virtue of the contract of insurance.
2. If these rights have been published or notified to the insurer, even by letter sent by registered post, the
insurer is only entitled to pay the amount due by him to the insured with the consent of the creditors.
3. When the thing insured has been attached or has been placed in judicial deposit, the insurer, if duly
notified thereof in the manner set out in the preceding paragraph, shall not pay any sum due by him to the
insured.

Article 771

The insurer shall be, by virtue of law, subrogated into the rights of action of the insured against the author of the
act causing the damage involving the responsibility of the insurer, to the extent of the compensation he has paid
in respect of the fire, unless the author of the damage is a relative of or related by marriage to the insured living
together in the same house, or a person for whose acts the insured is responsible.

Chapter 5 Suretyship

Article 772 Elements of Suretyship

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 111
Suretyship is a contract whereby a person guarantees the performance of an obligation by giving an undertaking
to the creditors to fulfill such obligation should the debtor fail to do so.

Article 773

Suretyship can only be established by writing, even if the principal obligation can be established by oral
evidence.

Article 774

When a debtor undertakes to offer a surety, he is bound to produce a solvent person residing in Egypt or an
adequate real security instead of the surety.

Article 775

Suretyship may be given without the knowledge and even in spite of the opposition of the debtor.

Article 776

Suretyship is valid only if the obligation to which it applies is valid.

Article 777

When a person guarantees the obligation of a debtor who is legally incapable and such guarantee is given
because of the debtor's lack of capacity, the surety is bound to perform the obligation if the guaranteed debtor
fails to do so himself.

Article 778
1. Suretyship may be entered into in respect of a future debt, if the amount for which the guarantee is given
is fixed beforehand. Suretyship may also be entered into in respect of a conditional liability.
2. A surety, however, who has given his guarantee for a future debt, but has not fixed the duration of such
guarantee, may revoke his guarantee at any time provided that the guaranteed debt has not been created.

Article 779
1. Suretyship entered into in respect of a commercial debt is deemed to be a civil act, even if the surety is a
trader.
2. The Suretyship resulting from backers' signatures and endorsements on negotiable instruments, is always
deemed to be a commercial act.

Article 780
1. Suretyship cannot be entered into in respect of a sum greater than that due by the debtor, nor can it be
subject to more onerous conditions than the debt guaranteed.
2. Suretyship may be entered into in respect of a smaller sum and subject to less onerous conditions.

Article 781

In the absence of an express agreement, Suretyship extends to the accessories of the debt, to the expenses of the
first demand for payment and to the expenses incurred after notice has been given to the surety.

Section 2 The Effects of Suretyship

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 112
1- The Relationship between the Surety and the Creditor

Article 782
1. A surety is discharged simultaneously with the debtor, and is entitled to avail himself of all the defenses
that are open to the debtor.
2. When, however, the defense raised by the debtor is based on his lack of legal competence, the surety who
was cognizant thereof at the time the contract was entered into is not entitled to raise this defense.

Article 783

When the creditor has accepted a thing of another kind in payment of the debt, the surety is discharged, even if
the thing given in payment is revendicated.

Article 784
1. A surety is discharged to the extent of the value of any warranties which the creditor has lost by his own
fault.
2. The warranties referred to in this Article are the securities assigned to guarantee the debt, even if they
were provided after the Suretyship was entered into; also any securities provided in accordance with the
law.

Article 785
1. A surety is not discharged merely by reason of the creditor's delay in taking proceedings or of the creditor
not taking proceedings.
2. A surety is, however, discharged if the creditor does not take proceedings against the debtor within six
months from the date of the summons served on him by the surety, unless the debtor himself provides an
adequate guarantee to the surety.

Article 786

When a debtor becomes bankrupt, the creditor is bound to prove his debt in the bankruptcy, under penalty of
being deprived of his remedy against the surety to the extent of the loss suffered by the surety as a result of the
creditor's failure to prove his debt.

Article 787
1. A creditor is bound to hand over to the surety, at the time of the discharge of the debt, all documents that
are necessary to enable him to exercise his right of action.
2. When the debt is secured by a pledge of a movable or by a right of retention on a movable, the creditor
must surrender such securities to the surety.
3. When, however, the debt is secured by a charge on an immovable property, the creditor must comply with
the formalities required for the transfer of such security. The expenses of such transfer are borne by the
surety, subject to his right of action against the debtor.

Article 788
1. A creditor has not the right to take proceedings against the surety alone, unless he has first taken
proceedings against the debtor.
2. He can only levy execution on the property of the surety after he has distrained all the property of the
debtor; it is for the surety, in such a case, to claim this right.

Article 789
1. When a surety demands that the debtor's property shall first be distrained, he must at his own expense
indicate to the creditor property of the debtor sufficient to satisfy the whole debt.
2. Property so indicated by the surety will not be taken into account if it is situated outside Egyptian

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 113
 territory, or if it is the subject of a dispute.

Article 790

When the surety has indicated property belonging to the debtor, the creditor will be responsible to the surety for
the debtor's insolvency if the creditor fails to take the necessary proceedings in due time.

Article 791

When a real security is assigned either by law or by agreement as guarantee of a debt, and suretyship is also
entered into subsequently or at the same time, without a stipulation that the surety is jointly liable with the
debtor, the surety's property can only be seized and sold after the real security assigned as guarantee has been
realized.

Article 792
1. When there are several sureties for the same debt by one contract and it does not provide for their joint
and several liability, the debt is apportioned between them and the creditor has only a right of action
against each of the sureties to the extent of his share in the suretyship.
2. If several sureties have undertaken to guarantee the same debt by successive contracts, each surety is
liable for the whole debt, unless he has reserved the right to apportion the liability amongst the
co-sureties.

Article 793

A surety who has jointly guaranteed the debtor cannot demand that the debtor's property first be distrained.

Article 794

A surety who has jointly guaranteed the debtor may avail himself of all defenses which a surety who is not
jointly liable may invoke with regard to the debt.

Article 795

Judicial and legal sureties are always jointly liable.

Article 796

When there are several sureties jointly liable, a surety who has paid the whole debt on maturity may call upon
each of the other sureties to pay his share of the debt as well as a proportional part in the share of any joint
surety who is insolvent.

Article 797

A surety may be guaranteed by another surety. In such a case, the creditor may not call upon the principal
surety's guarantee until he has taken action against the principal surety, unless the two sureties are themselves
jointly liable.

2- The Relationship between the Surety and the Debtor

Article 798
1. A surety must give the debtor notice before paying, on pain of forfeiture of his right of action against the
debtor, if the latter has himself paid the debt or has grounds, at the date of maturity, for having the debt

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 114
 declared void or extinguished.
2. If the debtor does not object to the payment, the surety retains his right of action against him, even though
the debtor had himself paid the debt or had grounds for having the debt declared void or extinguished.

Article 799

A surety who has paid the debt is subrogated to all the rights of the creditor against the debtor; if however, he
pays only part of the debt, the surety can only exercise such rights in respect of that part he has paid after the
creditor has recovered from the debtor the whole of the debt due.

Article 800
1. A surety who has paid the debt has a right of action against the debtor whether the suretyship was entered
into with or without the knowledge of the debtor.
2. This right of action includes the right to claim the capital amount of the debt, interest and expenses. The
surety, however, only has a right of action in respect of those expenses which he has incurred from the
date he has notified the principal debtor of the proceedings taken against him.
3. A surety is entitled to interest at the legal rate on all amounts that he has paid from the date of payment.

Article 801

When there are several debtors jointly liable for one and the same debt, a surety who has guaranteed them all,
has a remedy against each of them for all that he has paid in respect of the debt.

Part 2 Real Rights

Book 3 The Principal Real Rights

Chapter 1 The Right of Ownership

Section 1 The Right of Ownership in General

1- Scope and means of protection

Article 802

The owner of a thing has alone, within the limits of the law, the right to use, enjoy and dispose of it.

Article 803
1. The owner of a thing also owns everything that constitutes an essential element of the thing owned and
which cannot be separated therefrom without the thing owned perishing, deteriorating or changing.
2. The ownership of land includes that which is above and below, as far as it can be usefully enjoyed in
height and depth.
3. The ownership of the surface of the land may, by law or by agreement, be separated from that which is
above it and that which is below it.

Article 804

In the absence of a provision of the law or of an agreement to the contrary, ownership carries with it the right to
all fruits, products and accessories of the thing owned.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 115
Article 805

No one can be deprived of his property except in the cases and in the manner provided for by law and upon
payment of fair compensation.

2- Restrictions on the Right of Ownership

Article 806

An owner must, in the exercise of his rights, comply with the laws, decrees and regulations having for their
object the interests of the public and of individuals. He must also consider the following provisions:

Article 807
1. The owner must not exercise his rights in an excessive manner detrimental to his neighbor's property.
2. The neighbor has no right of action against his neighbor for the usual unavoidable inconveniences
resulting from neighborhood, but he may claim the suppression of such inconveniences if they exceed the
usual limits, taking into consideration in this connection custom, the nature of the properties, their
respective situations and the use for which they are intended. A license issued by a competent authority is
not a bar to the exercise of such a right of action.

Article 808
1. A person who constructs a private canal or drain in conformity with the regulations in force has the
exclusive right to its use.
2. Neighboring owners may, however, use the canal or drain for the irrigation or the drainage required for
their land after the owner of the canal or of the drain has used it to the satisfaction of his own needs. The
neighboring owners must, in such a case, contribute to the cost of construction and of maintenance of the
canal or drain, each in proportion to the area of land benefiting thereby.

Article 809

An owner must allow a passage through his land of the water necessary for the irrigation of land situate at a
distance from the source of the water and of drainage water coming from neighboring properties, so that it may
flow into the nearest public drain, provided that he is fairly compensated.

Article 810

When damage is caused to land by a canal or drain which crosses it, either by reason of failure to clear the drain
or by reason of the bad state of its banks, the owner of the land has the right to claim adequate compensation for
the damage done.

Article 811

In the absence of an agreement between the common users of a canal or a drain as to the execution of the
necessary repairs, they may, upon the demand of one of them, be compelled to contribute to the cost of such
repairs.

Article 812
1. An owner whose land is cut off from, or has no adequate exit on to, a public road, shall, if he cannot
obtain an exit to the public road without great expense or great difficulty, have a right of way over the
neighboring land as may be necessary for the normal working and use of his land and as long as his land
continues to be so cut off, subject to payment of fair compensation. This right of way must be exercised
over land and at the place where the passage causes the least possible damage.
2. If the land is cut off from the public road as a result of the property having been divided in consequence of

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 116
 a legal disposition, and it is possible to provide an adequate right of way over parts of the land so divided,
the right of way can be claimed only over those parts.

Article 813

Every owner has the right to compel his neighbor to place boundary marks along the boundaries of their
adjoining properties. The cost of such delimitation will be shared between them.

Article 814
1. An owner of a party wall has the right to make use of it for the purpose for which it was intended and to
use it for the support of beams to carry his own roof, provided that the wall has not to support too great a
weight for its strength.
2. When a party wall becomes unfit for the purpose for which it is normally intended, the cost of repairs or
reconstruction will be borne by the co-proprietors in proportion to their respective shares.

Article 815
1. An owner may, if he has good reason to do so, heighten a party wall, provided that he does not thereby
cause serious prejudice to his co-owner. He alone must bear the cost of heightening as well as of the
maintenance of the part so heightened and carry out the necessary work, so that the wall may support the
extra weight due to the heightening without its strength being diminished.
2. If the party wall is not able to support the heightening, the co-owner who desires to heighten the wall must
reconstruct the wall entirely at his own cost, in such a way as the thickening shall, as far as possible, abut
on his side. The reconstructed wall remains, apart from the heightened parts, a party wall, but the neighbor
who has re-heightened the wall cannot claim any compensation whatever.

Article 816

A neighbor who has not contributed to the expenses of heightening may become a co-proprietor of the
heightened part if he pays half the cost thereof and the value of half of the ground covered by the increased
thickness, if any.

Article 817

In the absence of proof to the contrary, a wall which at the time of its construction separated two buildings is
deemed to be a party wall up to the point at which it ceases to be a common wall to the two buildings.

Article 818
1. An owner cannot compel his neighbors to walk in his property or to assign to him part of a wall or of the
land on which the wall is constructed, except in a case provided for in Article (816).
2. An owner of a wall may not, however, demolish the wall on his own initiative if the demolition injures his
neighbor whose property is closed in by it, unless he has good reason for so doing.

Article 819
1. A neighbor is not entitled to have a direct view over his neighbor at a distance of less than one meter. This
distance is measured from the outside face of the wall in which the opening is made or from the outside
line of the balcony or other projection.
2. If a direct view has been acquired by prescription of a distance of less than one meter over the property of
a neighbor, such neighbor cannot himself build at a distance of less than one meter, measured in the
manner indicated above, along the whole length of the building in which the view was opened.

Article 820

A neighbor is not entitled to have an oblique view over the property of his neighbor at a distance less than fifty
centimeters from the outside edge of the opening. The prohibition ceases to have effect if the oblique view over

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 117
the neighboring property is at the same time a direct view over a public road.

Article 821

No distance is laid down for an opening for a light shaft if the base of the opening is above the limit of the
normal height of a man and if the opening is intended only for air and light and cannot give a view over the
neighboring property.

Article 822

Factories, wells, steam engines and establishments injurious to neighbors must be constructed at the distance
and subject to conditions laid down by regulations.

Article 823
1. If a contract or a will contains a clause stipulating the inalienability of a property, such a clause will only
be valid if based on a legitimate reason and limited to a reasonable duration.
2. The reason is deemed to be legitimate if the inalienability is stipulated with a view to protecting a lawful
interest of the person disposing of the property or of the person in whose favor the property is disposed of,
or of a third party.
3. A reasonable duration may extend for the life of the person disposing of, or the person in whose favor the
property is disposed of, or of a third party.

Article 824

When the clause as to inalienability in the contract or in the will is valid in accordance with the provisions of the
preceding article, any alienation contrary to such a clause is void.

3- In-common property

Article 825 Provisions Relating to Joint Ownership

When two or more persons are owners of the same thing, but their respective shares are not divided, they are
co-owners and, in the absence of proof to the contrary, their shares are deemed to be equal.

Article 826
1. Every co-owner in common is the absolute owner of his share. He may alienate his share and collect the
fruits thereof and make use of his share provided he does not injure the rights of the other co-owners.
2. If, however, the alienation relates to a specific part in the property held in common, and such part does not
come within the share of the settler when a division is made, the right of the acquirer is transferred to the
part that has devolved on the settler as a result of the division with effect from the moment of the
alienation. If the acquirer did not know that the settler was not the owner of the specific part of property
which he has alienated, he shall have the right to demand the cancellation of the alienation.

Article 827

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the management of a property held in common belongs jointly to
all the owners in common.

Article 828
1. A decision taken by the majority of the co-owners as to ordinary acts of management is binding on all of
them. The majority shall be calculated on the basis of the value of their shares. Failing a majority, the
Court may, upon the application of any one of the co-owners, take such measures as may be necessary in

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 118
 the circumstances and appoint, if needs be, a manager to manage the property owned in common.
2. The majority may select a manager and may also establish rules for the management and fuller enjoyment
of the property owned in common, which rules shall also be binding upon the successors in title of all the
co-owners whether such successors in title are universal or particular.
3. A co-owner who conducts the management of the joint property, without any objection being raised by
the other co-owners, is considered to be their agent.

Article 829
1. Co-owners who possess at least three quarters of the property in common may decide, with a view to
obtaining greater enjoyment of the property, to make essential modifications or changes, in the use for
which the property was intended, which exceed the normal scope of management, provided that these
decisions are notified to the other co-owners. Dissenting co-owners have a right of action in the Courts
within two months from the date of notification.
2. The Court before which such an action is brought may, if it approves the decision taken by the majority,
also order measures of expediency. The Court may, in particular, order that security be given to the
dissenting co-owners so as to guarantee any compensation that may become due to him.

Article 830

Every co-owner may also, even without the consent of the other co-owners, take measures necessary for the
preservation of the property in common.

Article 831

In the absence of any provision to the contrary, the cost of the management of a property held in common, as
well as the cost of its preservation, the taxes payable thereon, and all other charges resulting from the common
holding or connected with the property held in common, shall be borne by all the co-owners each proportionally
to his share.

Article 832

Co-owners who possess three-quarters at least of the property held in common may decide to alienate the
property, provided that their decision is founded on serious grounds and that the decision is notified to the other
co-owners. A dissenting co-owner has a right of action before the court within a delay of two months from the
date of notification. The court will decide, in accordance with the circumstances, in a case where the division of
the property held in common is contrary to the interests of the co-owners, whether the alienation of the property
should be carried out.

Article 833
1. A co-owner of a movable or of a property consisting of movables and immovables may, before partition,
repurchase any undivided share which has been sold by another co-owner to a third person. Such
repurchase must be made within a delay of thirty days from the day on which he had knowledge of the
sale or from the day on which the sale was notified to him. The right of repurchase is exercised by means
of a summons notified to both the Seller and the purchaser. The co-owner who has repurchased the share
sold will be subrogated into all the rights and obligations of the purchaser if he compensates him for all
that he has spent.
2. If several co-owners exercise their right to repurchase, each of them shall have the right to repurchase a
part proportional to his share.
The settlement of In-common property by Division

Article 834

Every co-owner may demand the division of property held in common, unless he is bound to remain a co-owner
in common by reason of a provision of the law or of an agreement. It is not permitted, by agreement, to prohibit
division for a period exceeding five years. When the period stipulated does not exceed five years, the agreement

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 119
shall bind a co-owner and his successors in title.

Article 835

Co-owners may, if they are all in agreement, divide the property held in common in whatever manner they deem
fit. If one of them is subject to legal incapacity, the formalities laid down by law will have to be observed.

Article 836
1. If co-owners are not in agreement as regards the division of the property held in common, the co-owner
who wishes to withdraw from the in-common property shall summon his co-owners to appear before the
Summary Court.
2. The court shall delegate, if need be, one or more experts to proceed with the valuation of the property held
in common and to divide it into separate parts if the property can be divided into separate parts in kind
without materially decreasing its value.

Article 837
1. The expert will proceed with the composition of the separate parts by taking as a basis the smallest share,
even where the division is only a partial one. If the division cannot be effected in this manner, the expert
may proceed directly to allot a separate part to each co-owner.
2. If one of the co-owners cannot obtain all his share in kind, he shall be compensated by a payment equal to
the shortage in his share.

Article 838
1. The Summary Court will decide upon any disputes relating to the composition of the separate parts and
any other disputes coming within its competence.
2. In the case of disputes which the Summary Court has not competence to settle, the court will refer the
parties to the Court of First Instance and will fix a date at which they must appear. The proceedings for
division will be held up until such disputes have been finally settled.

Article 839
1. Upon the disputes being disposed of and the separate lots allocated directly, the Summary Court will give
judgment allocating to each owner the divided part which devolves on him.
2. If there has been no direct allotment of the separate lots, the division of the property will be effected by
drawing lots. The court will draw up a process-verbal thereof and give judgment allocating to each
co-owner his divided part.

Article 840

If one of the co-owners is absent or under legal incapacity a judgment of division which has become final will
be ratified by the court in accordance with the provisions of law.

Article 841

If the division was not in kind or when such division involves a serious diminution in the value of the property it
shall be sold in the manner laid down by the Code of Procedure. Sale by auction will be restricted to the
co-owners in common if they ask for it unanimously.

Article 842
1. The personal creditors of any co-owner may oppose a division in kind or a sale by auction without their
intervention in the proceedings. Such opposition must be notified to all co-owners and has the effect of
compelling the co-owners to join the opposing creditors in every stage of the proceedings: otherwise the
division will be without effect as regards such opposing creditors. In any case, inscribed creditors must be
joined before an action for division is introduced.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 120
2. If the division has already taken place, the creditors who have not intervened cannot attack it unless there
has been fraud.

Article 843

Each co-divisioner is deemed to have been owner of the part of the property that falls to him from the day that
he became co-owner in common and never to have been owner of the other parts.

Article 844
1. The in-common partners warrant each other against interference or eviction due to a cause that existed
previous to the division. Each one of them is liable, in proportion to his share, to compensate an
in-common partner entitled to such compensation, on the basis of the value of the property at the moment
of division. If one of the in-common partners happens to be insolvent, the share falling on him will be
borne by the in-common partner entitled to the indemnity and all the solvent in-common partners.
2. No such warranty, however, exists when there is an express agreement waiving the warranty in the
particular case which would have given rise to the warranty. The warranty also ceases to be binding if the
eviction is due to a fault of the in-common partner himself.

Article 845
1. Division by agreement may be rescinded if one of the in-common partners succeeds in proving that he has
been injured to the extent of more than one fifth of his share, on the basis of the value of the property at
the time of the division.
2. The action for rescission must be commenced within the year following the division. The defendant can
stop the action and prevent the new division, by giving the plaintiff the amount by which his share is short
in money or in kind.

Article 846
1. By a provisional division, co-owners agree to allot to each other the enjoyment of a divided part of the
property equal to each of their shares in the property held in common in consideration of a renunciation in
favor of each other of the right of enjoyment of the other parts. Such an agreement cannot be entered into
for a duration of more than five years. If no duration has been fixed, or the agreed period has expired, and
no new agreement has been entered into, the period of the provisional division will be for a year
renewable, unless one of the co-owners gives notice of termination to his co-owners three months before
the end of the current year.
2. If such a provisional division remains in force for fifteen years it is converted into a final division, unless
otherwise agreed by the co-owners. If one of the co-owners remains in possession of a divided share for
fifteen years, such possession is presumed to have taken place as a result of a provisional division.

Article 847

A provisional division also takes place when the co-owners agree that each of them shall, the one after the other,
enjoy all the property held in common for a period corresponding to his share.

Article 848

A provisional division is governed, as regards its validity as against third parties, the capacity of in-common
partners, their rights and obligations, and means of proof, by the provisions of the law relating to contracts of
lease, in so far as they are not incompatible with the nature of such a division.

Article 849
1. The co-owners may agree, during the process of a final division, to enter into a provisional division. Such
provisional division will remain in force until the conclusion of the final division.
2. If the co-owners cannot reach an agreement for a provisional division, such a division may, upon the
application of one of the co-owners, be ordered by the Summary Judge upon the advice, if necessary, of
an expert.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 121
Article 850 Obligatory In-common property

The co-owners of a property held in common cannot demand its division if it follows, from the use to which the
property is intended, that it should always remain in common.

Article 851 Family In-common property

The members of the same family who have a common occupation or interest may agree in writing to create a
family joint ownership. This in-common property consists either of an inheritance which the members of a
family agree to leave wholly or partly in in-common property or of any other property belonging to them which
they agree to place in family joint ownership.

Article 852
1. A family in-common property may be created by agreement for a period not exceeding fifteen years. Each
one of the co-owners may, however, if there are serious grounds to do so, apply to the court for authority
to withdraw his share of the joint property before the end of the agreed term.
2. When no period is fixed for such joint ownership, each one of the co-owners may withdraw his share after
six months from the day he gives notice to this effect to the other co-owners.

Article 853
1. Co-owners cannot demand division so long as the family in-common property continues, and no co-owner
can dispose of his share in favor of a person who is not a member of the family without the consent of all
the co-owners.
2. If a person who is not a member of the family acquires, as a result of a voluntary or forced alienation, the
share of one of the co-owners, he only becomes a partner in the family in-common property if he and the
other co-owners consent thereto.

Article 854
1. Co-owners who own the majority in value of the shares, may appoint amongst themselves one or more
managers. Subject to any agreement to the contrary, the manager may introduce such changes in the
intended use of the property held in common as may ensure a better enjoyment of the property.
2. A manager may be discharged in the same manner as he was appointed, notwithstanding any agreement to
the contrary. The court may also, upon the demand of any owner, discharge him if there are serious
grounds to do so.

Article 855

Except for the preceding provisions, the provisions of in-common property and agency shall apply to the
property.

Article 856 Ownership of Stories in Buildings

1. In the absence of any provisions to the contrary in the title deeds, when the different stories or various
apartments of a building belong to different owners, such owners are considered co-owners of the ground
and of the parts of the building intended for the common use of all, especially of the foundations, the main
walls, the main entrances, yards, roofs, lifts, passages, corridors, the floor supports and pipes of all kinds
with the exception of pipes inside the stories or the apartments.
2. These parts of the building held in common cannot be divided; each of the owners has a share in these
parts in proportion to the value of his share in the building. No owner can dispose of his share in the parts
held in common independently of his share in the building.
3. The inner walls which separate two apartments belong as party property to the owners of these two
apartments.

Article 857

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 122
1. Every owner may, with a view to enjoying his part of the building, utilize the parts held in common, in
accordance with the use for which they are intended, provided he does not prevent the other owners
exercising their rights.
2. No modification can be made to the parts held in common, even in the event of reconstruction, without the
consent of all the owners, unless such modification, made by one of the owners, at his own cost, is of such
a nature as to facilitate the use of the parts held in common, does not change the use to which they were
intended and is not prejudicial to the other owners.

Article 858
1. Every owner must participate in the cost of the preservation, maintenance, management and
reconstruction of the parts held in common. Subject to any agreement to the contrary, the share of every
owner in these costs will be calculated in proportion to the value of his share in the building.
2. No owner can renounce his share in the parts held in common with a view to avoiding participation in the
costs referred to above.

Article 859
1. The owner of a lower storey is bound to execute works and repairs necessary to prevent the higher storey
from falling.
2. If he refuses to execute the necessary repairs, the judge may order the sale of the lower storey. In any
case, the "Judge des Referes" may order the execution of urgent repairs.

Article 860
1. If the building falls down, the owner of the lower storey is bound to rebuild his storey, failing which, the
judge may order the sale of the lower storey, unless the owner of the upper storey offers to rebuild the
lower storey himself at the cost of the owner of the lower storey.
2. In this latter event, the owner of the upper storey may refuse to allow the owner of the lower storey to
occupy or make use of his storey until he has repaid the amount of his debt. He may also obtain authority
to let or to occupy the lower storey in repayment of the amount due to him.

Article 861

The owner of the upper storey shall not heighten the building in such a way as to injure the lower storey.

Article 862 Syndicates of Owners of Stories of a Single Building

1. When a building, divided into stories or apartments, belongs to several owners, such owners may form a
syndicate amongst themselves.
2. A syndicate may also have for its object the construction or the acquisition of buildings with a view to
allocating the ownership of parts of such buildings to members of the syndicate.

Article 863

A syndicate may, with the consent of all it members, establish rules with a view to assuring a better enjoyment
and the good management of the building held in common.

Article 864

In the absence of such rules or if such rules do not contain provisions in respect of certain points, the right to
manage the parts held in common belongs to the syndicate, whose decisions will be, in this respect, binding,
provided that all the interested parties have been summoned to a meeting by registered letter and that the
decisions have been taken by a majority of the owners, calculated on the basis of the value of their shares.

Article 865

The syndicate may, with the consent of the majority prescribed in the preceding article, take out collective

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 123
insurances against risks to the building or to the co-owners jointly and may authorize, at the expense of the
owners who so demand, all works or installations which increase the value of all or part of the building, upon
the conditions and subject to such compensation and other obligations as may be laid down by the syndicate, in
the interests of the co-owners.

Article 866
1. A representative shall be appointed by the majority of the owners, as provided for in Article (864), to
carry out the decisions of the syndicate. If the required majority is not obtained, a representative of the
Syndicate will be appointed, at the request of one of the co-owners and upon the other owners being
called to give their views, by the President of the Court of First Instance within whose jurisdiction the
building is situate. The representative of the Syndicate shall, if need be, upon his own initiative, take all
necessary measures for the preservation, protection and maintenance of all parts held in common. He shall
be entitled to call on any party concerned to perform these obligations. These provisions shall apply in the
absence of any provision to the contrary in the rules of the Syndicate.
2. The representative of the Syndicate shall represent the Syndicate before the courts, even against the
owners if need be.

Article 867
1. The remuneration of the representative of the Syndicate will be fixed in the decision or order appointing
him.
2. The representative of the syndicate may be discharged by a decision taken by the majority of the
co-owners, as laid down in Article (864), or by an order of the President of the Court of First Instance
within whose jurisdiction the building is situate, after the co-owners have been summoned to be heard on
the question of his discharge.

Article 868
1. If the building is destroyed by fire or otherwise, the co-owners are, subject to any agreement to the
contrary, bound to conform to the decision of the syndicate as to its reconstruction taken by the majority,
as provided in Article (864).
2. If the syndicate decides to reconstruct the building, any amount due as compensation on account of the
destruction of the building shall, without prejudice to the rights of the registered creditors, be set aside for
the costs of reconstruction.

Article 869
1. Any loan made by the syndicate to one of the co-owners, in order to assist him to carry out his obligations,
will be secured by a concessionary charge on his divided part as well as on his undivided share in the parts
of the building held in common.
2. The rank of this concession will date from its registration.

Section 2 Reasons for Acquisition of Ownership

1- Acquisition by Appropriation

Article 870 The Appropriation of Movables without an Owner

Whoever takes possession of a movable which has no owner, with the intention of its appropriation, acquires the
ownership thereof.

Article 871
1. A movable is deemed to have no owner when its owner abandons possession of it with the intention of
renouncing his ownership thereto.
2. Animals, other than domestic animals, are deemed to have no owner as long as they are at liberty. If one

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 124
 of such animals, after losing its liberty, regains its freedom, it becomes without an owner if the owner
does not seek for it immediately or ceases to seek for it. An animal that has become tame and is
accustomed to return to the same place becomes again without an owner if it loses this habit.

Article 872
1. Buried or hidden treasure to which no one can establish ownership belongs to the owner or the bare owner
of the property on which it is discovered.
2. Treasure discovered on Waqf property belongs to the founder of the Waqf or to his heirs.

Article 873

Rights of fishing and hunting and rights to things found and to antiquities are governed by special regulations.

Article 874 The Appropriation of Immovables which have no Owner

Final text of the Article dated: 23/03/1964

1. Uncultivated land which has no owner is the property of the State.
2. The acquisition or the prescription right on uncultivated land may not be effected without a permit from
the State in accordance with the regulations.
3. Repealed.

2. Acquisition by Inheritance and Winding up of an Estate

Article 875
1. The establishment of the heirs or their hereditary shares and of the devolution of the property of the estate
on them is governed by the provisions of the Sharia and by the laws issued concerning them.
2. The following provisions apply to the winding up of an estate.

Article 876 The Appointment of an Administrator

In the absence of the appointment of a testamentary executor by the deceased, the court may, at the request of an
interested party, if it considers it necessary to do so, appoint as administrator of the estate a person chosen
unanimously by the heirs. In the absence of such unanimity, the judge will, after having heard the heirs, choose
an administrator, if possible from among the heirs.

Article 877
1. A person appointed administrator may decline to act or may, after having acted as administrator, renounce
the appointment in accordance with the provisions of the Agency.
2. The judge may also, for adequate reasons, either at the request of any of the interested parties or at the
request of the Public Prosecution, or of his own initiative, discharge an administrator and replace him by
another.

Article 878
1. The appointment of a testamentary executor by the deceased must be confirmed by the judge.
2. The rules applicable to an administrator of an estate apply equally to a testamentary executor.

Article 879
1. The clerk of the court must enter, day by day, the court orders as to the appointment of administrators and
the confirmation of testamentary executors, in a public register, recording the names of the deceased
person in accordance with the form prescribed for alphabetical indexes. He must enter in the margin of the
register all orders of revocation and all renunciations.
2. The entry of the order as to the appointment of an administrator will, as regards third parties dealing with

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 125
 the heirs in connection with immovable property belonging to the estate, have the same effect as the entry
provided for in Article (914).

Article 880
1. An administrator shall, upon his appointment, take possession of the property of the estate and proceed
with the winding up of the estate under the control of the court. He may apply to the court for
remuneration commensurate with the duties performed by him.
2. The estate shall bear the costs of the winding up. These costs will have a concession in the same
preferential rank as legal expenses.

Article 881

The court must, at the request of any interested party or of the Public Prosecution, or on its own initiative, take,
if need be urgent, necessary measures for the preservation of the property of the estate. The court may, in
particular, order that the property be placed under seal and that cash, securities and articles of value be placed in
deposit.

Article 882
1. The administrator must immediately pay, out of the assets of the estate, burial and funeral expenses in
accordance with the social standing of the deceased. He must also obtain an order from the "Juge de
Service" (Judge in Chambers) authorizing him to make, pending the final winding up, an adequate
alimentary allowance to such heirs as were supported by the deceased and to deduct such payments from
the share in the estate of each heir to whom such alimentary allowance is made.
2. Any dispute arising as regards such an allowance shall be settled by the Juge de Service.

Article 883 Inventory of the Estate

1. As from the date of the entry of the order appointing an administrator, the creditors of an estate can only
take proceedings or continue proceedings already commenced in connection with the estate against the
administrator.
2. Any distribution opened against the deceased before his death, in which the order of allotment has not
become final, must, at the request of any interested party, be suspended until all the debts of the estate
have been settled.

Article 884

No heir may dispose of estate assets, recover estate debts, or set off a personal debt against a debt of the estate
until an inheritance certificate, provided for in Article (901), has been delivered to him.

Article 885
1. An administrator is bound, during the winding up, to take the necessary measures to preserve and
administer the property of the estate. He must also represent the estate before the courts and proceed with
the recovery of debts due to the estate.
2. An administrator is, even if he is not remunerated, responsible to the same extent as a paid agent. The
judge may call on him to render an account of his administration at periodical intervals.

Article 886
1. An administrator must publish a notice calling on the creditors and debtors of the estate to submit
particulars of their claims and of their debts within a delay of three months from the last publication of the
notice.
2. This notice must be posted on the main door of the residence of the Mayor in the town or village in which
the estate property is situate, or on the main door of the police station in the town where this property is
situated, and on the notice board of the Summary Court within the jurisdiction of which the deceased was
domiciled at the date of his death. The notice must also be published in a daily newspaper with a wide
circulation.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 126
Article 887
1. An administrator must, within four months from the date of his appointment, file with the registry of the
court a statement of the assets and liabilities of the estate with an estimate of their value. He must also,
within the same time, inform every interested party by registered letter of the filing of the statement.
2. An administrator may apply to the judge for an extension of time, if this extension is justified by
circumstances.

Article 888
1. An administrator may employ, for the preparation of the inventory and for the estimation of the value of
the property of the estate an expert or a person with the necessary special experience.
2. An administrator must record claims and debts disclosed by the papers of the deceased, shown in public
registers or coming to his knowledge in any other way. The heirs must also advise the administrator of all
debts and claims of the estate known to them.

Article 889

Any person, including an heir, who fraudulently appropriates a part of the assets of the estate, is liable to the
penalties for misappropriation.

Article 890
1. Any dispute as to the accuracy of the inventory, particularly as regards the omission of assets, claims or
debts of the estate, or as to the entry in the records, should be submitted to the court by petition at the
request of any interested party within the thirty days following the notice of the filing of the inventory.
2. The court will investigate the dispute. If the court considers the claim to be a serious one, it will admit the
claim by an order which is subject to recourse in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Procedure.
3. If the dispute has not already been submitted to a court of justice, the court will fix a delay within which
the interested party should submit the claim to the competent court, which court will deal with the matter
as one of urgency.

Article 891 Discharge of the Debts of the Estate

Upon the expiration of the delay fixed for the submission of disputes arising on the inventory, the administrator
will proceed upon the authority of the court, with the payment of those debts of the estate which are
uncontested. Debts which are contested will be settled after the final decision of the court on the litigation.

Article 892

In the event of the estate being insolvent or of the possibility of it being insolvent, the administrator must
suspend the discharge of any debt, even uncontested, pending final decisions in respect of all disputes arising as
to debts of the estate.

Article 893
1. The administrator will discharge the debts of the estate with funds derived from claims recovered, cash in
hand, proceeds of the sale of securities at market prices, proceeds of the sale of movables and, if the funds
so obtained are insufficient, with the proceeds of the sale of immovable property of the estate.
2. The sale of movable and immovable property of an estate will be made by public auction in the manner
and subject to the delays laid down for forced sales, unless all the heirs agree the sale shall be carried out
by negotiation or in any other manner. If the estate is insolvent, the approval of all the creditors is also
necessary. The heirs are always entitled to take part in the auction.

Article 894

The court may, at the request of all heirs, pronounce the immediate maturity of a debt not yet due for payment,

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 127
and fix the amount payable to the creditor in accordance with the provisions of Article (544).

Article 895
1. If the heirs do not unanimously agree to demand the immediate exigibility of a debt not yet due for
payment, the court will proceed with the distribution of the debts not yet due for payment and of the assets
of the estate, so that each heir takes from such debts and assets a portion corresponding to the net value of
his share in the inheritance.
2. The court will give each creditor of the estate an adequate guarantee on a movable or immovable property,
reserving, however, to any creditor who had a special security that same security. When this is not
possible, even by additional security given by the heirs on their own property, or by any other
arrangement, the court will charge all the estate assets to provide such security.
3. In all these cases, if security has been given on an immovable property and has not already been
published, such security must be published in accordance with the provisions laid down as to the
publication of judgment charges on real property.

Article 896

Any heir may, after the distribution of the debts not yet due for payment, pay the amount allocated to him before
the due date in conformity with Article (894).

Article 897

Creditors of the estate, whose debts have not been paid because they were not shown in the inventory and were
not secured by a charge on the property of the estate, have no remedy against third parties who have acquired, in
good faith, a real right on this property, but have a right of action against the heirs to the extent to which the
heirs have benefited.

Article 898

An administrator shall, after discharge of the debts of the estate, proceed with the payment of the legacies and
other charges.

Article 899 Delivery and Division of the Property of the Estate

The residue of the property of the estate, after settlement of the liabilities, devolves on the heirs in proportion to
their legal shares in the inheritance.

Article 900
1. An administrator shall deliver to the heirs the property of the estate devolving on them.
2. The heirs may, upon the expiration of the time fixed for the submission of the disputes arising on the
inventory, demand that all or part of the things or cash which are not required for the winding up of the
estate be provisionally delivered to them, with or without security.

Article 901

The court will give to each heir who produces a legal notice of inheritance, or any other equivalent document as
to the inheritance, a certificate establishing his rights in the inheritance, the extent of his share therein and the
estate property devolving on him.

Article 902

An heir may call upon the administrator to deliver to him his share in the estate as a divided part, unless such an
heir is obliged to remain an owner in common by reason of an agreement or a provision of the law.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 128
Article 903
1. When a demand for division should be admitted, the administrator will proceed with the division
amicably, but this division will only become final upon the unanimous approval of the heirs.
2. If the heirs do not unanimously approve the division, the administrator must bring an action for the
division in accordance with the provisions of the law; the costs of this action will be charged to the estate
and deducted from the hereditary shares of the co-sharers.

Article 904

The rules laid down for division of property held in common, especially those as regards warranty against
disturbances and eviction, lesion and the preferential rights of an in-common partner, shall apply to the division
of estates, as well as the following provisions.

Article 905

In the absence of an agreement between the heirs as to the division of family papers or articles having a
sentimental value for the heirs owing to their relationship to the deceased, the court shall order either the sale of
these articles or their allocation to one of the heirs, with or without deduction of their value from his share in the
estate, taking into account both custom and the personal circumstances of the heirs.

Article 906

If there is, amongst the property of an estate, an agricultural, industrial or commercial enterprise constituting a
distinct economic unity, it must be allotted as a whole to such one of the heirs who applies for it if he is the most
capable of the heirs to carry on the enterprise. The price of such an enterprise will be fixed in accordance with
its value and will be deducted from his share in the estate. If the heirs are all equally capable of carrying on the
enterprise, it shall be allocated to the heir who offers the highest price, provided that this price shall not be less
than the normal price.

Article 907

If, at the time of division, a debt due to the estate is allocated to one of the heirs, the other heirs are not, in the
absence of an agreement to the contrary, guarantors of the debtor, if he becomes insolvent subsequent to the
division.

Article 908

A will dividing the property of the estate between the heirs of the testator and setting out the share of each heir
or of certain of the heirs is valid. If the value of the share so given to one of them exceeds his hereditary share,
the excess is deemed to be a legacy by will.

Article 909

A division made by disposition (mortis causa) may always be revoked. It becomes irrevocable on the death of
the testator.

Article 910

If such a division does not include all the property of the deceased at the date of his death, that property which
has not been included in the division devolves in common on the heirs in accordance with the rules as to
inheritance.

Article 911

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 129
If one or more of the contingent heirs included in the division predecease the deceased, the divided part allotted
to him or them devolves in common on the other heirs in accordance with the rules as to inheritance.

Article 912

The general rules as to division, with the exception of those relating to lesion, apply to the division made by
disposition (mortis causa).

Article 913

If the debts of the estate are not included in the division, or if these debts are included and the creditors do not
agree to the division, any heir may, if these debts are not settled in agreement with the creditors, call for a
division of the estate in accordance with Article (895). In this case, account must be taken, as far as possible, of
the division made by the deceased and the considerations which guided him as regards such division.

Article 914 Provisions Applicable to Estates that have not been Wound Up

When an estate has not been wound up in accordance with the preceding provisions, the unsecured creditors of
the estate may take action, in respect of their claims or their legacies, on the immovable property of the estate
which has been alienated or which has been charged with real rights to the benefit of third parties, provided that
they have recorded such claims in accordance with the provisions of the law.

3- Acquisition by Will

Article 915

Wills are governed by the provisions of Sharia and by laws on Wills.

Article 916
1. Every legal disposition made by a person during an illness immediately preceding his death, with the
object of making a gift, is deemed to be a testamentary disposition and must be governed by the rules
applicable to wills, no matter what description has been given to such an act.
2. The heirs of the person who has made such a legal disposition are the persons on whom falls the onus of
proving that it was made by the deceased during an illness immediately preceding his death. This proof
may be tendered in any way and the date of the legal instrument establishing the disposition cannot be
invoked against the heirs, unless it is an established date.
3. If the heirs establish that the legal disposition was made by the deceased during an illness immediately
preceding his death, the act is deemed to be a gift, unless the beneficiary proves that the contrary was the
case. The above provisions are subject to any special provisions to the contrary.

Article 917

In the absence of any evidence to the contrary, when a person disposes of a property in favor of one of his heirs,
reserving at the same time in some manner the possession and the enjoyment of the property so disposed of
during his lifetime, the disposition is deemed to be a testamentary disposition and must be governed by the rules
applicable to wills.

4- Acquisition by Accession

Article 918 Accession to Immovable Property

Alluvium formed gradually and imperceptibly by the river belongs to the neighboring owners.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 130
Article 919
1. Land uncovered by the sea belongs to the State.
2. No one may encroach upon the seashore except for the purpose of restoring the boundaries of his property
which has been covered by the sea.

Article 920

Owners of lands adjoining still waters, such as lakes and ponds, do not acquire ownership over land uncovered
by the retreat of these waters.

Article 921

The ownership of land displaced or uncovered by the river and of islands formed in its channel, is regulated by
special laws.

Article 922
1. All buildings, plantations and other works existing above or below the ground are deemed to have been
carried out by the owner of the land at his own expense and belong to him.
2. It may be proved, however, that such works were made by a third party at his own expense, as it may be
proved that the owner of the land has transferred the ownership of works already existing or the right to
erect and own such works to a third party.

Article 923
1. Constructions, plantations and other works carried out with materials belonging to another, become the
exclusive property of the owner of the land when the removal of these materials is not possible without
seriously damaging the works, or even when it is possible to do so but proceedings to recover the property
are not commenced within a year from the date on which the owner of the materials knew of their
incorporation in the works.
2. When the owner of the land acquires the property of the materials, he must pay their value together with
an indemnity, if indemnity is due. When, however, the owner of the materials recovers the materials, their
removal must be affected at the cost of the owner of the land.

Article 924
1. When a third party caries out works with his own materials on land which he knows is not his property,
without the consent of the owner of the land, the owner of the land may, within a year from the day on
which he learns of the execution of the works, demand either their removal at the cost of the third party
who erected them, together with an indemnity, if indemnity is due, or their retention against payment of
their break-up value or of a sum equal to the increased value they have given to the land.
2. A third party who carried out the works may claim the right to remove them if he does not cause any
damage to the land in so doing., unless the owner of the land chooses to keep the works in accordance
with the provisions of the preceding paragraph.

Article 925
1. If the third party who carried out the works mentioned in the preceding article honestly believed that he
was entitled to do so, the owner of the land has not the right to demand their removal, but he may, at his
option, and provided the third party does not claim their removal, pay the third party either the value of
the materials and the cost of the work or a sum equal to the increased value that the works have given to
the land.
2. If, however, the works are so extensive that the payment of the amount due in respect thereof is onerous
for the owner of the land, he may claim the conveyance of the ownership of the land to the third party
against payment of fair compensation.

Article 926

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 131
If a third party carries out works with his own materials, with the permission of the owner of the land, the owner
of the land cannot, in the absence of an agreement with regard to these works, demand their removal. The owner
of the land must pay to the third party, if the third party does not himself ask for their removal, one of the two
amounts laid down in the first paragraph of the preceding article.

Article 927

The provisions of Article (982) apply as regards payment of compensation referred to in the three preceding
articles.

Article 928

If during the construction of a building on his own land, an owner encroaches in good faith on part of an
adjoining land, the court may, within its discretion, compel the owner of the adjoining land to transfer to his
neighbor the ownership of that part which is occupied by the building, against payment of fair compensation.

Article 929

Light constructions, such as sheds, shops and shelters, erected on the land of another, which are not intended to
be maintained permanently, shall be the property of the person who erected them.

Article 930

If a third party carries out works with materials belonging to another party, the owner of the materials cannot
claim their restitution but he has a claim for compensation against the third party, and also against the owner of
the land up to the amount remaining due by him in respect of the value of the works.

Article 931 Accession to Movable Property

When two movables belonging to two different owners become mingled in such a way that they cannot be
separated without deterioration, the court, in the absence of any agreement between the two owners, shall decide
the matter in accordance with the rules of equity, having regard to the damage already done, the circumstances
and the good faith of each of the two parties.

5- Acquisition by Contract

Article 932

The ownership of movables and immovables and other real rights are transferred by contract, when the contract
refers to an object belonging to the person disposing of it, in accordance with Article (204) and subject also to
the following provisions.

Article 933

The ownership of a movable which is described only as regards its species is transferred only upon its
identification in accordance with Article (205).

Article 934
1. Ownership and other real rights over immovable property are not transferred either between parties or as
regards third parties unless the rules laid down in the law regulating the publication of real rights are
observed.
2. The law regulating the publication of real rights above referred to shall indicate the acts, judgments and

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 132
 instruments which should be published, whether they have the effect of transferring the ownership or not,
and shall determine the rules as regards such publication.

6- Acquisition by Preemption

Article 935 Conditions for the Exercise of the Right of Preemption

Preemption is the opportunity that a person has to substitute himself in a sale of immovable property in the
place of the purchaser, in the cases and subject to the conditions laid down in the following articles.

Article 936

The right of preemption belongs:

a. To the bare-owner, in the case of a sale of all or part of the usufruct attached to a bare property.
b. To the co-owner in common, in case of a sale to a third party of a part of the property held in common.
c. To the usufructuary, in case of a sale of all or part of the bare property which produces his usufruct.
d. In case of Quitrent, to the bare-owner if the sale relates to the right of Quitrent; and to the beneficiary of
the Quitrent if the sale relates to the bare property.
e. To the neighboring owner in the following cases:
a. In the case of buildings or building land whether situated in a town or in a village.
b. If the land enjoys a right of servitude over the land of a neighbor, or if a right of servitude exists in
favor of the land of a neighbor over the land sold.
c. If the land of a neighbor adjoins the land sold on two sides and the value is at least half of the value
of the land sold.

Article 937
1. When several persons preempt, the right of preemption will be exercised in the order set out in the
preceding article.
2. If several persons of the same degree exercise the rights of preemption, the right of preemption will
belong to each one of them in proportion to his share.
3. If a purchaser is, in accordance with the provisions laid down in the preceding article, entitled to exercise
the right of preemption, he will be preferred to other preemptors of the same degree or of a lower degree,
but those of a higher degree will have priority over him.

Article 938

If a person acquires a property which may be subject to preemption and sells it prior to any notification of an
intention to preempt or prior to the transcription of such notification in accordance with Article (942),
preemption can only be exercised against the second purchaser and subject to the conditions upon which he has
purchased the property.

Article 939
1. Preemption cannot be exercised:
a. If the sale is made by public auction in accordance with the procedure prescribed by law.
b. If the sale is made between ascendants and descendants, between spouses or between relatives to the
fourth degree, or between relatives by marriage to the second degree.
2. If the property sold is destined for religious purposes, or to be annexed to property already used for such
purposes.
3. A Waqf cannot exercise the right of preemption.

Article 940 Procedure for Preemption

Whoever desires to exercise the right of preemption must, on pain of forfeiture of his right, notify both the
Seller and the purchaser of his intention within a period of fifteen days from the date of a formal summons
served on him either by the Seller or by the purchaser. This period is increased, if necessary, by the time

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 133
allowance for distance.

Article 941

The formal summons provided for in the preceding article must, on pain of nullity, contain the following
particulars:
a. An adequate description of the property subject to preemption.
b. The amount of the price, the costs, the conditions of sale, and the first names, surnames, professions and
domiciles of the Seller and the purchaser.

Article 942
1. Notification of intention to exercise the right of preemption must, on pain of nullity, be made through the
court. It is not valid as against third parties unless it is transcribed.
2. The actual sale price must, within thirty days at the most from the date of this notification, be deposited in
full at the "Caisse" of the court of the district in which the property is situated, and in any event before the
introduction of the action in preemption. If this deposit is not made within the prescribed time and
manner, the right of preemption shall be forfeited.

Article 943

An action in preemption must, under pain of forfeiture, be introduced against the Seller and the purchaser before
the court of the district in which the property is situated, and enrolled on the court list within thirty days from
the date of notification provided for in the preceding article. The case will be disposed of as a matter of urgency.

Article 944

Without prejudice to the rules with regard to transcription, the judgment which finally establishes the right to
preemption will constitute the title of ownership of the preemptor.

Article 945 Effects of Preemption

1. The preemptor is, vis-a-vis the Seller, substituted for the purchaser in all his rights and obligations.
2. The preemptor is not, however, entitled to benefit from the delay granted to the purchaser for payment of
the price unless he obtains the consent of the Seller.
3. If, after preemption, the property is claimed by a third party, the preemptor will only have a right of action
against the Seller.

Article 946
1. If, before the notification of preemption, the purchaser has built or planted on the property preempted, the
preemptor is bound, at the option of the purchaser, to pay to the purchaser either the amount spent by him
or the amount of the increase in value of the property as a result of such constructions or plantations.
2. When, however, such constructions or plantations have been made after the notification of preemption,
the preemptor may claim their removal. If he prefers to retain them, he is only bound to pay the value of
the building materials and the labor of the planting expenses.

Article 947

Mortgages and charges registered against the purchaser, and any sale made by him and any real right granted by
or registered against him after the date of transcription of the notification of preemption, are not valid as against
the preemptor. Registered creditors, however, will retain their rights of preference on that part of the price of the
property which reverts to the purchaser.

Article 948 Abatement of the Right of Preemption

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 134
The right of preemption shall abate in the following cases:
a. If the preemptor renounces his right, even before the sale.
b. If four months have elapsed since the date of the registration of the deed of sale.
c. In all other cases prescribed by law.

7. Holdership

Article 949 Acquisition, Transfer and Loss of Holdership

1. Possession does not result from acts that are done by permission or merely tolerated.
2. Possession obtained by acts of violence, secretly or in a dubious manner has effect, as regards the person
against whom the violence, secrecy or dubious means were exercised, only from the time that such
unlawful means have ceased.

Article 950

A person lacking discretion may acquire possession by the intervention of his legal representative.

Article 951
1. Possession may be exercised by an intermediary, provided that he exercises it in the name of the possessor
and that his relationship to the possessor is such that he is obliged to obey his instructions as regards the
possession.
2. In case of doubt, a person who is actually in possession is presumed to be in possession on his own behalf.
If he continues a former possession, the continuation of such possession is presumed to be on behalf of the
person who commenced the possession.

Article 952

Possession is transmitted by a possessor to another by mutual agreement, without actual delivery of the thing
which is the object of possession being made, provided the person to whom the possession has been transmitted
is able to assume control of the right over the thing forming the object of possession.

Article 953

Possession may be transmitted without actual delivery if the possessor continues the possession on behalf of his
successor in title or if the successor in title continues the possession for his own account.

Article 954
1. The handing over of documents issued in respect of goods entrusted to a carrier or deposited in store, is
equivalent to the handing over of the goods themselves.
2. If, however, the documents are handed over to one person and the goods to another, both being in good
faith, the person who receives the goods has the preference.

Article 955
1. Possession is transmitted with all its features to a universal successor in title. When the original possessor
was of bad faith, his success or in title may, however, if he establishes his good faith, avail himself
thereof.
2. A successor in title holding under a special title may add to his possession that of the original possessor
for the legal effect of possession.

Article 956

Possession ceases when the possessor abandons his actual control over the right or when he loses it in any other

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 135
way.

Article 957
1. Possession does not cease if a temporary obstacle prevents the possessor from exercising his actual
control over the right.
2. Possession ceases, however, if this obstacle continues for a whole year and is the result of a new
possession exercised against the wish or without the knowledge of the possessor. The period of one year
runs from the moment from which the new possession commences, if it takes place openly, or from the
day on which the former possessor knew of it, if it commences secretly.

Article 958 Protection of Possession (The three possessory actions)

1. A person who is in possession of an immovable and who loses possession thereof may, during the year
which follows his loss of possession, claim to be reinstated in possession. If the loss of possession was
secret, the delay of one year commences from the day on which the loss of possession is discovered.
2. A person who exercises possession on behalf of another person may also claim to be reinstated in
possession.

Article 959
1. A person losing possession after having been in possession for less than a year, can claim to be reinstated
if the person dispossessing him has not a better possession than his own. The possession is better if
founded on a legal title. If neither possessor has a title nor both possessors have titles of equal value, the
better possession is that which commenced first.
2. If the loss of possession takes place by violence, the possessor may always claim restitution within a year
following the loss of possession.

Article 960

A person who has been dispossessed may take proceedings, within the time allowed by law, for recovery of
possession against the person who has possession of the property of which he was dispossessed, even if such
person acted in good faith.

Article 961

A person who remains in possession of an immovable for a whole year may, if he is disturbed in his possession,
take proceedings during the year which follows the disturbance for the discontinuance of the disturbance.

Article 962
1. A person who remains in possession of an immovable for a whole year may, if he has good grounds to
fear disturbance as a result of new works which threaten his possession, apply to the Judge to order the
suspension of such works, provided that they have not been finished and that a year has not elapsed since
the commencement of the works which may cause him damage.
2. The Judge may either stop or authorize the continuance of the works. In both cases he may order the
provision of an adequate guarantee: in the case of a judgment ordering the suspension of the works, to
cover compensation for damage caused by the suspension if a final decision shows that the claim for
discontinuance of the works was without foundation; and in the case of a judgment ordering the
continuance of the works, to cover the cost of their total or partial demolition as compensation for the
damage suffered by the possessor if he obtains a final judgment in his favor.

Article 963

When several persons claim possession of the same right, the person who has actual possession is presumed to
be provisionally the possessor unless it is established that he acquired possession in a wrongful manner.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 136
Article 964

The possessor of a right is presumed, until the contrary is proved, to be its rightful owner.

Article 965
1. The possessor of a right who is unaware that he infringes the right of another is presumed to be of good
faith, unless his ignorance was the result of a serious mistake.
2. If the possessor is a juristic person, it is the good or bad faith of its representative that will be taken into
account.
3. Good faith is always presumed in the absence of proof to the contrary.

Article 966
1. The good faith of a possessor ceases only from such time as he becomes aware that his possession
infringes the rights of another.
2. Good faith ceases as soon as the defects of the possession have been notified to the possessor in the writ
by which legal proceedings are commenced. A person who has usurped the possession of another by
violence is deemed to have acted in bad faith.

Article 967

Subject to proof to the contrary, possession continues to have the same character that it had at the time it was
acquired.

Article 968 Effects of Holdership - Acquisitive Prescription

A person who has possession of a movable or immovable without being its owner, or of a real right over a
movable or immovable without a just title thereto, may acquire the ownership of the thing or the title to the real
right if his possession continues uninterrupted for fifteen years.

Article 969
1. When a person remains in possession, in good faith and by virtue of a just title, of an immovable or of a
real right over an immovable, the period of acquisitive prescription is five years.
2. Good faith is required only at the moment of conveyance of the right.
3. A just title is a document of title emanating from a person who is not the owner of the property or the
beneficiary of the right that it is desired to acquire by prescription, and must be duly registered.

Article 970

In any case, Waqf property and hereditary rights are only acquired by prescription by possession for thirty-three
years. Stated-owned property or public legal persons-owned property may not be owned; the same applies also
to the properties of economic units affiliated to public organizations or government bodies and public sector's
corporations not affiliated to any of them, charitable endowment, and no real right may be acquired over such
properties by way of prescription.

The properties referred to in the preceding article may not be encroached upon; however, in case of encroach
upon the same, the competent minister shall have a right to remove the encroach administratively.

Article 971

Present possession, whose existence can be proved to have existed at an ascertained previous time, is presumed
to have existed during the intervening time unless the contrary is proved.

Article 972

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 137
1. No one can set up prescription contrary to his title: that is to say that no one may by himself and in his
own interests change the cause and origin of his possession.
2. A person may, however, acquire a title by prescription if the nature of his possession is changed either by
the act of a third party or if such person sets up an adverse claim against the owner; but in such a case
prescription only runs from the date of such change.

Article 973

Subject to the following provisions, the rules as to extinctive prescription, in so far as they are not incompatible
with the nature of acquisitive prescription, are applicable as regards the calculation of the period of prescription,
its suspension or interruption, claims as regards prescription in court, the renunciation of prescription and any
agreement as to modification of the period.

Article 974

Acquisitive prescription, whatever its period, is suspended if any cause exists for such suspension.

Article 975
1. Acquisitive prescription is interrupted if the possessor abandons or loses possession even by the act of a
third party.
2. Prescription is not, however, interrupted by loss of possession if the possessor recovers possession within
a year or takes proceedings for the recovery of possession within that period.

Article 976 The Acquisition of Movables by Holdership

1. A person in possession of a movable, of a real right over a movable or of a bearer warrant by virtue of a
just title becomes the owner thereof if at the moment he acquired possession, he was of good faith.
2. If he enters into possession, in good faith and by virtue of a just title, in the belief that the thing is free of
all charges and encumbrances, he acquires the thing free of such charges and encumbrances.
3. Subject to proof to the contrary, mere holdership is a presumption of a just title and good faith.

Article 977
1. Whoever duly owns a movable property or a real right over movable property or a bearer deed shall be the
owner of same, if he acts in bona fide at time of holding the same.
2. When the thing lost or stolen is found in possession of a third party who bought it in good faith on the
market, at a public sale or from a merchant selling similar articles, such third party is entitled to recover
from the person claiming restitution the price he paid for the thing.

Article 978 The Acquisition of the Fruits by Holdership

1. A possessor acquires all fruits collected so long as he is of good faith.
2. Natural or industrial fruits are deemed to be collected from the moment that they are separated. Legal
fruits are deemed to be collected day by day.

Article 979

A possessor in bad faith is responsible for all the fruits that he has collected or that he has failed to collect, from
the moment he became of bad faith. He may, however, claim refund of his expenses in connection with the
production of the fruits.

Article 980 Recovery of Expenses

1. The owner to whom the property is restituted must pay to the possessor all expenditure of a necessary
kind that he has incurred.
2. The provisions of Articles (924) and (925) shall apply as regards expenditure of an advantageous kind.
3. If the expenditure is of a luxurious nature, the possessor cannot claim repayment of any of such

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 138
 expenditure. He may, however, remove works he has made, provided he restores the property to its
original condition, unless the owner prefers to keep the works upon payment of their breakup value.

Article 981

A person who takes possession from a previous owner or possessor, may, if he establishes that he has paid to
such previous owner or possessor the expenditure incurred by him, demand repayment from the person claiming
ownership.

Article 982

The Jude may, at the request of the owner, select the method which he considers suitable for the repayment of
the expenses referred to in the two preceding articles. He may also order repayment by periodical installments,
provided that the necessary security is supplied. The owner may free himself from this obligation by paying in
advance a sum equal to the amount of such installments less interest calculated at the legal rate up to the date
fixed for payment.

Article 983 Liability for Damage

1. A possessor in good faith who has enjoyed the thing in accordance with his presumed rights, is not liable
to pay any compensation on this account to the person to whom he must restitute the thing.
2. He is only liable for the loss or deterioration of the thing up to the amount of profit he has received in
consequence of such loss or deterioration.

Article 984

If the possessor is a possessor in bad faith, he is liable for the loss or deterioration of the thing, even fortuitous,
unless he proves that such loss or deterioration would have occurred even if the thing had been in the possession
of the person claiming restitution.

Chapter 2 Rights Derived from the Right of Ownership

Section 1 The Right to Usufruct, the right of User and the right of Occupation

1- Usufruct

Article 985
1. The right of usufruct may be acquired by a legal disposition, by preemption or prescription.
2. Usufruct may be bequeathed by will to successive persons if they are alive at the moment of the bequest;
it may also be bequeathed to a child "en ventre".

Article 986

The rights and obligations of a usufructuary are governed by the conditions imposed by the deed by which the
usufruct is created and by the provisions contained in the following articles.

Article 987

The fruits of the property which is subject to the usufruct revert to the usufructuary, in proportion to the period
of his usufruct, subject to the provisions of paragraph 2 of Article (993).

Article 988

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 139
1. The usufructuary must use the property in the state in which he has received it and according to the object
for which it was intended; he must observe the rules of good management.
2. The owner may object to any use of the property that is unlawful or unsuitable to the nature of the
property. If the owner proves that his rights are endangered, he may demand security and if the
usufructuary does not provide such security or if, in spite of the objections of the owner, he continues to
use the property unlawfully or in a manner unsuitable to its nature, the judge may take the property from
him and entrust it to a third party for its management; the judge may also, in circumstances of a serious
nature, declare the usufruct extinguished, without prejudice to the rights of third parties.

Article 989
1. The usufructuary is liable, during the continuance of his enjoyment, for all normal charges in respect of
the property subject to the usufruct and all expenses for repairs incidental to its maintenance.
2. The owner is obliged to pay abnormal expenses and the cost of heavy repairs which do not arise from any
fault on the part of the usufructuary, but the usufructuary is bound to pay to the owner interest on the
amount expended by him in this respect. If the usufructuary has himself advanced the cost, he is entitled
to obtain repayment of the capital amount paid by him when the usufruct terminates.

Article 990
1. The usufructuary must preserve the thing with the usual diligence of a normal man.
2. He is responsible for the loss of the property even through no fault on his part, if he has delayed to
restitute the property to its owner after the termination of the usufruct.

Article 991

The usufructuary must give notice to the owner without delay if the property perishes, deteriorates or requires
major repairs the cost of which should be borne by the owner, or if it is necessary to take protective measures
against an unforeseen danger. The usufructuary must also advise the owner if a third party claims to have a right
over the property.

Article 992
1. When the property subject to the usufruct is a movable, an inventory must be made thereof and the
usufructuary must give security in respect thereof; if no security is given, the movable in question shall be
sold and the proceeds invested in public funds and the income thereof paid to the usufructuary.
2. A usufructuary who has given security may use such things as are consumable provided that he replaces
them when his usufruct comes to an end. The usufructuary is entitled to the natural increase of flocks and
herds, after replacing therefrom such animals as have perished accidentally.

Article 993
1. The usufruct terminates at the end of the time for which it was fixed. If no time is fixed, it is deemed to
have been created for the lifetime of the usufructuary. It ceases in any case upon the death of the
usufructuary even before the end of the fixed time.
2. When there are standing crops on the land which is subject to the usufruct, at the end of the time fixed for
the usufruct or upon the death of the usufructuary, such land shall be left in possession of the usufructuary
or of his heirs until the crops are ripe for harvesting, but the usufructuary or his heirs shall pay rent for that
period.

Article 994
1. Usufruct is extinguished by the loss of the property, but the usufruct is transmitted to any property
obtained in lieu of the property destroyed.
2. If the loss is not due to the fault of the owner, he is not bound to restore the property to its original
condition, but if he restores the property, the usufruct is re-created in favor of the usufructuary if the loss
was not imputable to him; in such a case paragraph 2 of Article (989) applies.

Article 995

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 140
The right of usufruct is extinguished by non-user during a period of fifteen years.

2- The Right of User and Occupation

Article 996

Subject to the conditions laid down in the deed by which the right is created, the extent of the right of user and
of the right of occupation is determined by the personal requirements of the beneficiary and of his family.

Article 997

The right of user and the right of occupation may only be transferred to third parties by virtue of a formal
provision to that effect or for serious reasons.

Article 998

Subject to the preceding provisions, the rules as regards the right of usufruct apply to the right of user and to the
right of occupation, if they are not incompatible with the nature of these two rights.

Section 2 The Right of Quitrent

Article 999

Quitrent cannot be concluded for a period exceeding sixty years. If a longer period is fixed or if the period is not
fixed the Quitrent is deemed to have been concluded for a period of sixty years.

Article 1000

Quitrent can only be concluded for reasons of necessity or expediency and with the permission of the Sharia
Court of First Instance in the district in which the land or that part of the land which is most valuable is situated.
It must be established by virtue of a deed drawn up by the President of the court, or by a judge or by a notary
delegated by him for the purpose, and must be published in accordance with the provisions of the law relating to
the publication of real rights.

Article 1001

The grantee of a Quitrent may dispose of his right; this right is transmissible by inheritance.

Article 1002

Constructions, plantations and other works carried out by the grantee of the Quitrent belong to him absolutely.
He may dispose of them separately or together with the right of Quitrent.

Article 1003
1. A grantee of the Quitrent must pay the agreed rent to the grantor of the Quitrent.
2. In the absence of a provision to the contrary in the contract creating the Quitrent, the rent is payable at the
end of each year.

Article 1004
1. A Quitrent cannot be concluded at a rent less than the normal price.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 141
2. This rent is increased or diminished at the rental value of similar lands rises or falls by more than one
fifth, provided that eight years have passed since the last valuation.

Article 1005

The estimation of this rise or fall is made on the basis of the rental value of the land at the time of valuation,
taking into account its marketable value and the demand for it, and regardless of any constructions or
plantations on it. Improvements or deteriorations caused to the land or to the value of the neighboring land by
the grantee of the Quitrent, as well as his surface rights over the land, should be disregarded.

Article 1006

The new estimate applies only from the time agreed between the parties, or, in the absence of an agreement,
from the date of the commencement of the legal proceedings.

Article 1007

The grantee of the Quitrent must take the necessary measures to make the land suitable for exploitation, taking
into account the agreed conditions, the nature of the soil, the use to which it is intended and the provisions of the
authority's custom.

Article 1008
1. The right of Quitrent terminates at the end of the period fixed.
2. The right terminates, however, before the end of the period fixed, if the grantee of the Quitrent dies before
having built on or planted the land, unless all the heirs ask for the maintenance of the Quitrent.
3. The right of Quitrent also terminates before the end of the period fixed, if the land burdened with the
Quitrent ceases to be Waqf property, unless this cessation results from the revocation of the Waqf or the
reduction of the period of Waqf by the founder, in which case the Quitrent is maintained until the end of
its period.

Article 1009

The grantor of the Quitrent may demand the termination of the contract if the rent is not paid to him for three
consecutive years.

Article 1010
1. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the grantor of the Quitrent may, upon termination or
termination of the contract, claim either the removal of the buildings and plantations or their maintenance
against payment of the value of the buildings and plantations in their existing state or their value if
removed, whichever is the lesser.
2. The court may accord the grantor of the Quitrent a time for payment if exceptional circumstances exist
that justify such a delay, in which case the grantor must furnish security to guarantee the payment of the
amount due by him.

Article 1011

The right of Quitrent is extinguished by non-user during a period of fifteen years, unless the right of Quitrent is
constituted in Waqf, in which case it is extinguished by non-user during a period of thirty three years.

Article 1012
1. Subject to the provisions of Article (1008), paragraph 3, no Quitrent may, from the date upon which this
law comes into force, be established on land that is not constituted in waqf.
2. Quitrent existing on lands that are not constituted in waqf at the time that this law comes into force are
subject to the provisions of the preceding articles.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 142
Article 1013 Some Kinds of Quitrent
1. Idjaratein is a contract under which a waqf creates a quitrent on land on which buildings are erected which
are in need of repair, in consideration of the immediate payment of a sum of money equal to the value of
these buildings and the payment of an annual rent for the land equal to the rental value of similar lands.
2. Subject to the provisions of the preceding paragraph, the rules as to Quitrent apply to such a contract.

Article 1014
1. The Kholou-el-intifaa is a contract by which a Waqf grants a lease of a property even without the
permission of the judge, in consideration of a fixed rent for an indefinite time.
2. In accordance with this contract, the lessee undertakes to render the property fit for exploitation; the Waqf
may, at any time, terminate the contract by due notice in accordance with the rules as to contracts of lease,
provided that the Waqf compensates the lessee for his expenses in accordance with the provisions of
Article (179).
3. Subject to the provisions of the two preceding paragraphs, the provisions relating to leases of Waqf
property are applicable to such a contract.

Section 3 Easement (Servitudes)

Article 1015

A servitude is a right which limits the enjoyment of a property for the benefit of another property belonging to
another owner. A servitude may be imposed on State property in so far as it is not incompatible with the use for
which such property is intended.

Article 1016
1. The right to a servitude is acquired by a legal disposition or by inheritance.
2. Only apparent servitudes, including rights of way, can be acquired by prescription.

Article 1017
1. Apparent servitudes may also be created by the intention of the original owner.
2. An intention of the original owner is deemed to exist when it is established, by any means of proof, that
the owner of two separate properties has made between the two properties an apparent distinction, thereby
creating a relationship of subordination between them which would indicate the existence of a servitude if
the two properties belonged to different owners. If, in such a case, the two properties pass into the hands
of different owners without any change in their condition, a servitude is deemed, in the absence of a clear
condition to the contrary, to have been constituted to the benefit of or has as a burden on the two
properties respectively.

Article 1018
1. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, if specific restrictions have been imposed limiting the right
of the owner of a property to build freely thereon, such as the prohibition to build above a certain height
or on an area in excess of a specific area, such restrictions constitute servitudes which are burdens one the
property concerned in favor of properties to whose benefit these restrictions have been imposed.
2. Any breach of these servitudes gives rise to a claim for material redress. The court may, however, only
grant damages if it considers that there are reasons for so doing.

Article 1019

Servitudes are governed by rules laid down in the deed by which they are created, by local custom and by the
following provisions.

Article 1020

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 143
1. The owner of the dominant tenement is entitled to carry out any works necessary to use and preserve his
right of servitude; he must use his right in the least harmful manner possible.
2. No requirements of the dominant tenement cannot entail any increase in the burden of the servitude.

Article 1021

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the owner of the servient tenement is under no obligation to
carry out work for the benefit of the dominant tenement, unless it is an accessory work necessitated by the
normal use of the servitude.

Article 1022
1. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the cost of the necessary works for the use and
preservation of the servitude must be borne by the owner of the dominant tenement.
2. If the owner of the servient tenement is responsible for carrying out these works at his own cost, he has
always the right to free himself of this burden by abandoning the servient tenement wholly or in part to
the owner of the dominant property.
3. If the works also benefit the owner of the servient tenement, the cost of upkeep falls on the two parties in
proportion to the profit derived by each of them.

Article 1023
1. The owner of the servient tenement has no right to do anything which will tend to diminish the use made
of the servitude or to make it more inconvenient. He cannot, in particular, either change the condition in
which the land was or change the place originally fixed for the use of the servitude by another.
2. When, however, the place originally fixed has become such as to increase the burden of the servitude or to
cause the servitude to hinder the owner of the servient tenement making improvements to the servient
tenement, he may demand that the servitude be transferred to another part of the property or to another
property belonging to him or to a third party who consents thereto, provided that the owner of the
dominant tenement is able to exercise his rights of servitude in these new conditions as easily as he was
able to do before the change.

Article 1024
1. If the dominant tenement is divided, the servitude continues to benefit each part thereof, provided that the
burden on the servient property is not increased.
2. If, however, the servitude only benefits one of the divided parts of the dominant tenement, the owner of
the servient tenement may demand that it ceases as regards the other parts.

Article 1025
1. If the servient tenement is divided, the servitude continues to subsist in respect of each part thereof.
2. If, however, the servitude is not actually used and cannot be used on certain of these divided parts, the
owner of each of them may demand that it ceases as regards the part belonging to him.

Article 1026

Rights to a servitude cease to exist by the expiration of the period for which they were created, by the total loss
of the servient tenement or of the dominant tenement and by the acquisition of the two properties by the same
owner; the rights to the servitude are, however, revived if the two properties cease, with retroactive effect, to be
held jointly by the same owner.

Article 1027
1. The rights to a servitude are extinguished by non-user for a period of fifteen years; if the servitude is
created for the benefit of a Waqf property, this period shall be thirty three years. The manner of the
exercise of a right of servitude may, as the servitude itself, be modified by prescription.
2. The user of the servitude by one of the co-owners in common of a dominant tenement interrupts the
prescription in favor of the other co-owners; in the same way, the suspension of prescription in favor of

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 144
 one of these co-owners, suspends prescription in favor of the others.

Article 1028
1. The servitude ceases to exist if conditions so change that the right can no longer be used.
2. The servitude is revived if conditions are reestablished in such a way that the right can again be used,
unless the right of servitude has been extinguished by non-user.

Article 1029

The owner of a servient tenement may free himself wholly or partially of the servitude, if the servitude has lost
all its utility for the dominant tenement or if its actual utility has been reduced out of proportion to the burden
imposed on the servient tenement.

Book 4 Accessory Real Rights Or Real Securities

Chapter 1 Mortgages

Article 1030

Mortgage is a contract by which a creditor acquires, over an immovable appropriated to the payment of his debt,
a real right by which he obtains preference, over ordinary creditors and creditors following him in rank, for the
payment of his claim out of the price of the immovable, no matter into whose hands the immovable has passed.

Section 1 The Establishment of Mortgages

Article 1031
1. A mortgage can only be constituted by an authentic document.
2. The costs of this authentic document are, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, borne by the
mortgagor.

Article 1032
1. The mortgagor may be the debtor himself or a third party who consents to mortgage his property in the
interests of the debtor.
2. In both cases, the mortgagor must be the owner of the mortgaged property and must have legal
competence to dispose of it.

Article 1033
1. If the mortgagor is not the owner of the mortgaged property, the mortgage contract becomes valid if
ratified by the true owner of the property by an official deed. In the absence of ratification, the mortgage
is only effective from the time that the immovable becomes the property of the mortgagor.
2. A mortgage on property in expectancy is void.

Article 1034

A mortgage constituted by an owner whose title to the property is subsequently annulled, terminated, abolished
or ceases to exist for any other reason, remains a valid mortgage in favor of the Creditor on mortgage creditor if
he has acted in good faith at the time of the conclusion of the mortgage.

Article 1035
1. In the absence of any provision of the law to the contrary, a mortgage can only be constituted on

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 145
 immovable property.
2. The mortgaged property must be marketable and capable of being sold by public auction; it must be
specifically and precisely described both as regards its nature and situation, and such description must be
contained either in the deed constituting the mortgage or in a subsequent authentic document, otherwise
the mortgage is void.

Article 1036

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, and without prejudice to the concession provided for by Article
(1148) attached to sums due to contractors or to architects, a mortgage extends to the accessories of the
mortgaged property which are considered to be immovable accessories, particularly to servitudes, properly
forming part of the immovable as a result of the use to which it is put and to improvements and other works
which benefit the owner.

Article 1037

From the date of the transcription of the formal summons to pay, the fruits and revenues of the mortgaged
property shall be assimilated to the immovable and distributed in the same way as the price of the property.

Article 1038

The owner of constructions erected on land belonging to a third party may grant a mortgage on these
constructions. In such a case, the mortgage shall have a preferential claim for recovery of his debt on the price
of the break up value of the constructions if they are demolished, and on the compensation paid by the owner of
the land if he keeps the constructions in accordance with the rules of accession.

Article 1039
1. A mortgage granted by all the co-owners of an immovable held in common remains effective whatever
may be the ultimate result of a division of the immovable or if its sale by auction owing to impossibility of
division.
2. If one of the owners grants a mortgage on his undivided share or on a divided part of an immovable and,
as a result of the partition, a property other than the mortgaged property is attributed to him, the mortgage
will be transferred, with its degree of priority, to a portion of this property equivalent in value to the value
of the property formerly mortgaged. This portion will, upon petition, be fixed by an order of the judge.
The Creditor on mortgage shall be bound, within ninety days of the notification of the transcription of the
division made to him by any interested party, to proceed with a new inscription describing the portion of
the property to which the mortgage has been transferred. The mortgage so transferred shall not have any
prejudicial effect on a mortgage already granted by all the co-owners or on the concessions of in-common
partners.

Article 1040

A mortgage may be granted to secure a conditional, future or contingent debt, and may also be granted to secure
an opened credit or the opening of a current account, provided that the amount of the debt secured, or the
maximum amount which such debt may attain, is fixed in the mortgage deed.

Article 1041

In the absence of a provision of the law or of an agreement to the contrary, every part of the mortgaged
immovable or immovables shall secure the whole of the debt, and each part of the debt is secured by the whole
of the mortgaged immovable or immovables.

Article 1042
1. In the absence of a provision of the law to the contrary, the mortgage cannot be separated from the debt
that it secures, but depends both as regards its validity and as regards its extinction, upon the debt itself.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 146
2. If the mortgagor is a person other than the debtor, he may, in addition to the defenses that are personal to
him, avail himself of those which belong to the debtor as regards the debt: he keeps this right
notwithstanding the renunciation of the debtor.

Section 2 The Effects of a Mortgage

1- The Effects of a Mortgage as between the Parties

Article 1043 As Regards the Mortgagor

A mortgagor may dispose of the mortgaged property, but any disposal of the property by him does not affect the
right of the Creditor on mortgage creditor.

Article 1044

The mortgagor may carry on the management of the mortgaged property and collect the fruits thereof until such
time as they become incorporated in the immovable property.

Article 1045
1. A lease entered into by a mortgagor cannot have effect against a Creditor on mortgage unless such lease
has been given an established date before the transcription of the formal summons to pay. A lease that has
not an established date before this transcription or that has been entered into after the transcription of the
summons, without payment of the rent having been made in advance, will not have effect as against a
mortgagee, unless it may be considered to fall within the category of acts of good management.
2. If the duration of the lease entered into before the transcription of the summons exceeds nine years, the
lease has effect against the Creditor on mortgage only for nine years, unless it was transcribed before the
inscription of the mortgage.

Article 1046
1. A receipt or an assignment of rent in advance for a period not exceeding three years is not valid as against
a Creditor on mortgage unless it has an established date prior to the transcription of the summons of
expropriation.
2. If the payment of the assignment of rent is made for a period exceeding three years, it will only be valid as
against a Creditor on mortgage if it has been transcribed before the inscription of the mortgage. In default
of such transcription the period will be reduced to three years, subject to the provisions of the preceding
paragraph.

Article 1047

A mortgagor is the guarantor of the effectiveness of the mortgage. The Creditor on mortgage may oppose any
act or omission that appreciably diminishes his security, and, in the case of emergency, take all necessary
preservative measures and claim from the mortgagor the expenses incurred in this respect.

Article 1048
1. If the mortgaged property perishes or deteriorates by the fault of the mortgagor, the Creditor on mortgage
may either claim adequate security or immediate payment of the debt.
2. If the loss or deterioration is not imputable to the mortgagor and the Creditor on mortgage does not agree
to leave his claim without security, the debtor may either furnish adequate security or pay the debt in full
before it falls due. In the latter case, if the debt does not carry interest, the Creditor on mortgage has only a
right to an amount equal to the amount of his claim less the interest calculated at the legal rate from the
date of payment to the date of maturity.
3. In all cases, if acts are done which may result in the loss of or deterioration to the mortgaged property, or
which may render the mortgaged property insufficient to secure the debt, the Creditor on mortgage may

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 147
 apply to the judge to order the cessation of such acts and the adoption of the necessary measures to avoid
the occurrence of the loss.

Article 1049

In the event of loss of or deterioration to the mortgaged property for any reason whatsoever, the mortgage is
transferred, in its order of rank, to any right obtained as a result of such loss or deterioration, such as
compensation, monies paid on account of insurance or payments on account of expropriation for public utility.

Article 1050 As Regards the Creditor on mortgage

If the mortgagor is a person other than the debtor, only the mortgaged property, to the exclusion of his other
property, may be proceeded against and the mortgagor shall not, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary,
have the right to demand the sale of the debtor's property before the sale of the mortgaged property.

Article 1051
1. A creditor may, upon a summons to the debtor to pay, proceed, within the delays and in accordance with
the forms prescribed by the Code of Procedure, with the expropriation and the sale of the mortgaged
property.
2. If the mortgagor is a person other than the debtor, he may avoid any proceedings against him by
abandoning the mortgaged property, according to the procedure and the rules laid down for the
abandonment of an immovable by a third party holder.

Article 1052
1. Any agreement, even if entered into after the constitution of the mortgage, which authorizes the creditor in
case of non-payment of the debt on maturity to acquire the mortgaged property at a fixed price, whatever
that price may be, or to sell the mortgaged property without observing the formalities prescribed by law, is
void.
2. It may, however, be agreed after the debt or one of the installments of the debt has fallen due, that the
debtor transfers to the creditor the mortgaged property in payment of the debt.

2- The Effects of Mortgage as Regards Third Parties

Article 1053
1. Subject to the provisions laid down for bankruptcy, a mortgage shall be effective as against third parties
only if the deed or the judgment establishing the mortgage has been inscribed before third parties have
acquired real rights on the property.
2. The assignment of a right secured by an inscription, the right resulting from the legal or contractual
subrogation into that right and the assignment of priority in rank of an inscription in favor of another
creditor, are only enforceable as against third parties if they are inscribed in the margin of the original
inscription.

Article 1054

The inscription, its renewal, its radiation, the annulment of radiation and all the effects thereof are governed by
the provisions of the law regulating the publication of real rights.

Article 1055

In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the mortgagor shall bear the cost of inscription, its renewal and
its radiation.

Article 1056 The Right of Priority and the Right of Tracking

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 148
Creditors on mortgage will be paid before unsecured creditors out of the proceeds of sale of the mortgaged
property, or out of any monies obtained in substitution thereof, in the order of the rank of their inscriptions, even
when their inscriptions are entered on the same day.

Article 1057

A mortgage ranks from the date of its inscription, even if it secures a conditional, future or contingent debt.

Article 1058
1. The inscription of a mortgage will have the effect of automatically collocating and ranking with the
mortgage debt the costs of the deed, of the inscription and of the renewal.
2. If the rate of interest if fixed in the deed, the inscription of the mortgage will have the effect of collocating
in the same rank as the mortgage debt the interest of the two years immediately preceding the
transcription of the formal summons to pay and the interest due since that date to the date of sale by public
auction, without prejudice to specific inscriptions made to secure other interest that has already become
due, which interest will take rank with effect as from the date of the registration of such specific
inscriptions. The transcription by one of the creditors of a formal summons to pay will benefit all the other
creditors.

Article 1059

A Creditor on mortgage may, within the limits of his secured debts, assign his rank in favor of another creditor
having a mortgage inscribed on the same property. The defenses available against the first creditor, with the
exception of those connected with the extinction of his claim when that extinction occurs after the assignment of
the rank, can be raised against the second creditor.

Article 1060
1. A Creditor on mortgage may, upon maturity of the debt, take proceedings for the expropriation of the
mortgaged property against a third party holder, unless this third party holder chooses to pay the debt,
redeem the mortgage or abandon the property.

Article 1061

A third party holder may, upon maturity of the debt secured by the mortgage, pay the debt and its accessories
including the costs of proceedings from the date of the formal summons, and will retain this right up to the date
of the sale by public auction. In such a case, he has a claim for all he has paid against the debtor and against the
former owner of the mortgaged property. He may also be subrogated into the rights of the creditor who has been
paid in full, with the exception of those rights relative to guarantees furnished by a person other than the debtor.

Article 1062

A third party holder must maintain the inscription of the mortgage to the benefit of which he is subrogated to the
creditor, and renew it, if necessary, until radiation of the inscriptions that existed, at the time of the transcription
of his title to the property.

Article 1063
1. If, by reason of his acquisition of the mortgaged property, the third party holder is debtor of a sum due
immediately for payment and sufficient to satisfy all the creditors whose rights are inscribed on the
property, each one of the creditors may compel him to pay his claim provided that his title deed to the
property has been transcribed.
2. If the debt owed by the third party holder is not yet due for payment, or is less than the debts due to the
creditors, or different from them, the creditors may, if they are all agreed, claim from the third party
holder payment of what he owes, up to the amount due to them, and payment will be effected in
accordance with the conditions on which he has agreed to pay in his original undertaking, and at the time

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 149
 agreed upon for payment.
3. In neither case can the third party holder avoid payment to the creditors by abandoning the property, but
when payment has been made to the creditors the property is deemed to be free of all mortgages and the
third party holder has the right to call for the radiation of the inscriptions existing on the property.

Article 1064
1. The third party holder who has transcribed his title to the property may purge the property of any
mortgage inscribed before the transcription of his title.
2. He can exercise this right even before the creditors on mortgage have served upon the debtor a formal
summons to pay, or have served upon the third party holder any summons, and he keeps this right up to
the date of the filing in court of the conditions of sale of the property.

Article 1065

If the third part holder decides to proceed with the purge of the property, he must serve upon the inscribed
creditors, at their elected domiciles indicated in their inscriptions, summons containing the following
particulars:
a. An extract of his title deed, setting out the particulars and the nature and date of the act of disposition, the
name in full and precise particulars of the previous owner of the property, the situation and a detailed and
precise description of the property, and, if the disposal is a sale, the price and the charges, if any, that may
be considered as part of the price.
b. The date and number of the transcription of his title.
c. The sum at which he values the property, even if the property is disposed of by sale: this sum must not be
less than the reserve price in the case of expropriation nor in any case less than the sum remaining to be
paid by the third party holder on the price of the property if the act of disposition was a sale. If parts of the
property are charged with separate mortgages, each part must be valued separately.
d. A list of rights inscribed on the property before transcription of his title: this list shall contain the date of
the inscriptions, the amount of the inscribed debts and the names of the creditors.

Article 1066

The third party holder must, by the same summons, declare that he is prepared to pay off the inscribed debts up
to the amount at which he has valued the property; his offer need not be accompanied by actual production of
the money but must be an offer of a sum payable in cash, whatever may be the date at which the inscribed debts
accrue due.

Article 1067

Every inscribed creditor and every surety of an inscribed debt has the right to apply for the sale of the property
which the third party holder wishes to purge, provided that his application is made within thirty days of the date
of the last formal summons. This period will be increased by the additional time allowed for distance between
the actual and elected domicile of the creditor; this additional time allowed for distance shall not exceed thirty
additional days.

Article 1068
1. The application shall be made by a summons to the third party holder and to the former owner, signed by
the applicant or his representative holding a special Agency for this purpose. The applicant must deposit
at the Court's treasury a sum which is sufficient to cover the cost of the sale by auction, but he shall have
no right to a refund of expenses advanced by him if no higher price than that offered by the third party
holder is obtained as a result of the auction. The failure to comply with any one of these conditions entails
the nullity of the application.
2. The applicant may not renounce his application without the consent of all the inscribed creditors and all
the sureties.

Article 1069
1. When an application is made for the sale of a property, the formalities laid down for compulsory

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 150
 expropriation must be followed. The sale shall take place at the request of either the applicant or of the
third party holder, whoever shall have more interest in expediting the sale. The applicant must mention in
the notices of sale the price at which he has valued the property.
2. The purchaser by auction is liable, in addition to payment of the price of the adjudication and the cost of
formalities for the purge, to refund to the third party holder who is dispossessed the cost of his deed, of its
transcription and the cost of the summons served by him.

Article 1070

If the sale of the property is not applied for within the period and in accordance with the procedure laid down,
the ownership of the property, freed from all inscriptions, shall be vested finally on the third party holder if he
pays the sum at which he has valued the property to the creditors whose rank entitles them to payment, or if he
deposits this sum at the court's treasury.

Article 1071
1. The abandonment of the mortgaged property is made by a declaration submitted to the Registrar of the
competent Court of First Instance by the third party holder who must apply for the entry of his declaration
in the margin of the transcription of the formal summons to pay and who must, within five days from the
date of the declaration, notify the abandonment to the creditor who is conducting the proceedings of
expropriation.
2. The party who has most interest to expedite the sale may apply to the Judge des Referes for the
nomination of a Custodian against whom the proceedings of expropriation may be taken. The third party
holder, if he applies, will be appointed Custodian.

Article 1072

If the third party holder does not opt for payment of the inscribed debts, the purge of the property or the
abandonment of the property, the Creditor on mortgage can only take expropriation proceedings against him, in
accordance with the provisions of the Code of Procedure, after he has summoned him to pay the debt accrued
due or to abandon the property. This summons shall be notified after or at the same time as the summons to pay
is served on the debtor.

Article 1073
1. The third part holder who has transcribed his title deed and who was not a party to the proceedings in
which judgment was given against the debtor to pay the debt may, if the judgment was subsequent to the
transcription of his title, raise the defenses which could have been raised by the debtor.
2. He may, in any case, raise defenses which the debtor still has the right to raise after the judgment.

Article 1074

The third party holder may take part in the auction on condition that he does not offer a price lower than the sum
that he still owes on the price of the property which is being sold.

Article 1075

If the mortgaged property is expropriated, even after proceedings for purge or abandonment have been taken
and the third party holder acquires the property at the auction, he will be deemed to be the owner of the property
by virtue of his original title deed and the property will be purged of all inscriptions if he pays the price for
which he acquired the property at the auction or if he deposits the price in the court's treasury.

Article 1076

If, in the preceding cases, a person other than the third party holder acquires the property at the auction, he will
hold his right be virtue of the judgment of adjudication from the third party holder.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 151
Article 1077

If the price at which the property is sold by auction exceeds the total of the sums due to the inscribed creditors,
the difference in excess belongs to the third party holder; and the Creditor on mortgage creditors of the third
party holder may be paid out of this excess.

Article 1078

Servitudes and other real rights that the third party holder had on the property before he acquired the property
are re-vested in him.

Article 1079

The third party holder is liable to restitute the fruits of the mortgaged property from the date he has been
summoned either to pay or abandon the property. If legal proceedings are abandoned within three years, he has
only to account for the fruits as from the day that a new summons is served on him.

Article 1080
1. The third party holder has, against his preceding owner, a right of action for warranty to the extent that a
successor in title has against the person from whom he has acquired the property for valuable
consideration or as a gift.
2. He has also a right of action against the debtor for payment of any sums paid by him, for any reason
whatsoever, in excess of the amount due by him in accordance with his title deed. He is subrogated into
the rights of the creditors discharged by him, particularly into the guarantees furnished by the debtor, but
not into those furnished by a party other than the debtor.

Article 1081

The third party holder is personally liable towards creditors for any deterioration caused to the immovable by
his negligence.

Section 3 Extinguishment of the Mortgage

Article 1082

The mortgage is extinguished when the secured debt is extinguished; it is revived, together with the debt, if the
cause by reason of which it was extinguished disappears, without prejudice, however, to the rights acquired by a
third party in good faith in the interval between the extinguishment of the right and its revival.

Article 1083

When the formalities of a purge are carried out, the mortgage is definitely extinguished even if the ownership of
the third party holder who proceeded with the purge disappears for any cause whatsoever.

Article 1084

When the mortgaged property is sold by public auction as a result of compulsory expropriation proceedings
taken against either the owner, the third party holder or the Custodian to whom the abandoned property was
delivered, the mortgage rights encumbering the property are extinguished by the deposit of the purchase price or
by payment thereof to the inscribed creditors who, by virtue of their rank, are entitled to receive payment of
their claims out of that price.

Chapter 2 Judgment Charges upon Immovable Property

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 152
Section 1 The Constitution of a Judgment Charge

Article 1085
1. Every creditor who has obtained an enforceable judgment rendered on the merits of the case in which the
debtor is condemned to a liquidated amount, may, if he is of good faith, obtain as security for his claim in
principal, interest and costs, a judgment charge over the immovable property of his debtor.
2. He cannot, after the death of the debtor, obtain a judgment charge on immovable property forming part of
the estate.

Article 1086

A judgment charge cannot be obtained by virtue of a judgment rendered by a foreign court or by virtue of an
arbitration award until the judgment or the award has been made enforceable.

Article 1087

A judgment charge may be obtained by virtue of a judgment confirming a compromise or an agreement between
the parties, but not by virtue of a judgment rendered as to the validity of a signature.

Article 1088

A judgment charge can only be obtained on one or more specific immovables belonging to the debtor at the
time of the inscription of this right and capable of being sold by public auction.

Article 1089
1. A creditor who wishes to obtain a judgment charge on the immovable property of his debtor must submit
an application to the President of the Court of First Instance in the district in which the immovable
property on which he desires to obtain the charge is situated.
2. An authenticated copy of the judgment or a certificate by the clerk of the court containing the operative
part of the judgment must be annexed to this application which will contain the following particulars:
a. The creditor's surname, first names, profession, actual place of abode, and elected domicile within
the town in which the court is situated.
b. The surname, first names, profession and place of abode of the debtor.
c. The date of the judgment and designation of the court that rendered the judgment.
d. The amount of the debt. If the debt mentioned in the judgment is not a liquid amount, the President
of the court may liquidate it provisionally and fix the amount for which a judgment charge may be
obtained.
e. An exact and precise description of the immovable properties, their situation, together with
documents establishing their value.

Article 1090
1. The President of the court will record his order for a judgment charge at the foot of the application.
2. The President of the court should, however, in giving an order for a judgment charge, take into
consideration the amount of the debt and the approximate value of the immovable properties set out in the
application, and should, if necessary, restrict the judgment charge to some or one only of these
immovables, or to a part in an immovable if he considers that this is sufficient to secure the principal of
the debt, the interests and expenses thereon and the cost thereof due to the creditors.

Article 1091

Upon the same day as the order authorizing the judgment charge is rendered, the clerk of the court must notify it
to the debtor, endorse it on the authenticated copy of the judgment or on the certificate annexed to the
application for a judgment charge, and inform the clerk of the court that has rendered the judgment so that he

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 153
may endorse the order on any other copy of the judgment or on any other certificate that will be delivered to the
creditor.

Article 1092
1. The debtor may lodge an appeal against the order authorizing the judgment charge either before the judge
who has given the order or before the Court of First Instance.
2. An endorsement must be made, in the margin of the inscription, of any order or of any judgment annulling
the order which has authorized the judgment charge.

Article 1093

If, either at the time of the application or as a result of an appeal by the debtor, the President of the court rejects
the application of the creditor for a judgment charge, the creditor may appeal to the Court of First Instance
against the order rejecting the application.

Section 2 The Effects of a Judgment Charge, its Reduction and Extinguishment

Article 1094
1. Any interested party may apply for the reduction of the judgment charge to reasonable proportions, if the
value of the immovable properties charged therewith is in excess of the amount which is sufficient to
secure the debt.
2. The reduction of the judgment charge may be operated either by way of restriction of the charge to one
part of the immovable or immovables on which it is inscribed or by the transfer of the charge to another
immovable the value of which adequately secures the debt.
3. The costs required for carrying out the reduction, even if made with the consent of the creditor, are
payable by the person who has applied for the reduction.

Article 1095

A creditor who has obtained a judgment charge has the same rights as a Creditor on mortgage who has obtained
a mortgage. Subject to any special provision of the law, the judgment charge is governed by the same provisions
as a mortgage, especially as regards its inscription, its renewal, its radiation, the indivisibility of the right, its
effect and its extinguishment.

Chapter 3 Pledge

Section 1 Elements of a Pledge

Article 1096

Pledge is a contract by which a person undertakes, as security for his debt or that of a third party, to hand over
to the creditor or to a third person chosen by the parties, a thing over which he constitutes, in favor of the
creditor, a real right, and by which the creditor is allowed to retain the thing pledged until repayment of the debt
and to obtain payment of his claim out of the price of such thing, no matter in whose hands it may be, in
preference to unsecured creditors and to creditors following him in rank.

Article 1097

Only movables or immovables which can be sold independently by public auction may be the object of a
Pledge.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 154
Article 1098

The provisions of Article (1033) and Articles (1040) to (1042) relating to mortgage are applicable to Pledge.

Section 2 The Effects of a Pledge

1- Between the Contracting Parties

Article 1099 Obligations of the Pledgor

1. The pledgor is bound to deliver the thing Pledged to the creditor or to the third person chosen by the
contracting parties to receive the thing.
2. Provisions relating to the obligation as to delivery of a thing sold apply to the obligation as to delivery of a
thing sold.

Article 1100

The Pledge is extinguished if the thing pledged returns into the hands of the pledgor, unless the pledge holder
proves that the return took place for a reason that was not intended to extinguish the Pledge, subject always to
the rights of third parties.

Article 1101

The pledgor guarantees the Pledge and its efficacy. He must not do anything which diminishes the value of the
thing pledged or prevents the creditor exercising his rights derived from the contract. The pledge holder may, in
case of urgency, take at the cost of the pledgor all necessary measures for the preservation of the thing pledged.

Article 1102
1. A pledgor guarantees the thing pledged against loss or deterioration when such loss or deterioration is due
either to his negligence or to force majeure.
2. The provisions of Articles (1048) and (1049), relating to the loss or deterioration of mortgaged property
and to the transfer of the right of the creditor to any rights or property that have replaced the mortgaged
property, apply to Pledge.

Article 1103 Obligations of the Pledge holder

If the pledge holder takes delivery of the thing pledged, he must use for its preservation and maintenance the
care expected from a reasonable person. He must answer for its loss or deterioration unless he can show that
they were due to force majeure not imputable to him.

Article 1104
1. The pledge holder may not derive any gratuitous advantage from the thing pledged.
2. He must, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, make the thing pledged render all the fruits that it
is capable of producing.
3. The net revenue and the benefit that he obtains from the use of the thing pledged, must be applied in
reduction of the debt, even before it falls due: such revenue or benefit shall be imputed in the first place to
expenses he has incurred for the preservation of and repairs to the thing pledged, then to expenses and
interest, and then to the capital amount of the debt.

Article 1105
1. If the thing pledged produces fruits or revenue, and the parties have agreed to substitute these fruits or
revenue in whole or in part for interest, such an agreement will be valid to the extent that it does not
exceed the maximum conventional rate of interest authorized by the law.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 155
2. If the parties have not agreed that the fruits will be substituted for interest, and have not fixed the rate of
interest, the interest will be fixed at the legal rate, provided that it does not exceed the amount of the
fruits. If the parties have not fixed a date for payment of the secured debt, the creditor can only demand
payment of his claim by a deduction from the fruits, subject to the right of the debtor to pay off his debt at
any time he chooses to do so.

Article 1106
1. The pledge holder shall manage the thing pledged and shall use in such management the care expected
from a reasonable person. He may not, without the consent of the pledgor, change the method of
exploitation of the thing pledged and is bound to advise the pledgor immediately of any matter that
requires his intervention.
2. If the pledge holder misuses this right or is guilty of bad management or gross negligence, the pledgor
shall have the right to demand that the thing pledged be placed in judicial deposit or to claim restitution of
the thing against payment of his debt. In the latter case, if the secured debt is not subject to interest and is
not yet due for payment, the creditor will only be entitled to a sum equal to the amount of the debt, less
interest at the legal rate from the date of payment to the date of maturity.

Article 1107

A pledge holder must, upon receipt of his debt and the accessories, expenses and compensation for losses
attached thereto, restitute the thing pledged to the pledgor.

Article 1108

The provisions of Article (1050), relating to the responsibilities of a mortgagor who is not the debtor, and the
provisions of Article (1052), relating to appropriation in case of non-payment and to sale without recourse to
legal formalities, apply to Pledge.

2- As Regards Third Parties

Article 1109
1. The thing pledged must be held by the pledge holder or by the third party chosen by the parties to make
the Pledge valid as against third parties.
2. The thing pledged may secure several debts.

Article 1110
1. Pledge confers upon the pledge holder the right to retain the thing pledged against any other person,
subject to the rights of third parties which have been preserved in accordance with the law.
2. If a pledge holder loses possession of the thing unknowingly or against his will, he has the right to reclaim
the thing from any other person in accordance with the provisions of the law as to possession.

Article 1111

A contract of pledge secures not only the capital of the debt, but also and in the same rank:
a. Expenses of a necessary kind incurred for the preservation of the thing pledged.
b. Compensation for losses resulting from defects in the thing pledged.
c. The cost of the contract of loan, of the contract of pledge and of its inscription, when necessary.
d. The costs incurred for the enforcement of the pledge.
e. All interest that has fallen due, subject to the provisions of Article (230).

Section 3 Extinguishment of a Pledge

Article 1112

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 156
A right of pledge is extinguished as a result of the extinguishment of the secured debt: it is revived with the debt
if the cause of the extinguishment of the debt disappears, without prejudice to the rights of third parties in good
faith legally acquired in the interval between the extinguishment and the revival of the right of pledge.

Article 1113

A right of pledge is also extinguished by one of the following causes:

a. The renunciation of the right by the pledge holder if he has the legal competence to liberate the debtor of
the debt. The renunciation may result tacitly if the creditor voluntarily gives up the thing pledged or if he
agrees without reserve to its alienation. If, however, the thing pledged is charged with a right in favor of a
third party, the renunciation of the pledge holder is only valid as regards such third party if such third
party consents.
b. The union of the right of pledge and that of ownership of the thing pledged in one and the same person.
c. The loss of the thing pledged or the extinguishment of the right given in pledge.

Section 4 Certain Kinds of Pledge

1- Pledge of an Immovable

Article 1114

A pledge of an immovable is only valid as against third parties if, in addition to delivery of the pledged
immovable to the pledge holder, the contract of pledge is inscribed. The provisions governing the inscription of
a mortgage apply to the inscription of pledge of an immovable.

Article 1115

A pledge holder of an immovable may lease the immovable to the pledgor without the contract of pledge being
less valid as against third parties. If the lease is agreed to in the contract of pledge, it must be mentioned in the
inscription of the pledge, but if the lease is agreed to after the pledge, it must be noted in the margin of that
inscription. Notation is not necessary if the lease is tacitly renewed.

Article 1116
1. A pledge holder of an immovable must provide for the maintenance of the immovable, pay the expenses
necessary for its preservation, the annual taxes and charges, and deduct the amount of these expenses from
the fruits he has collected or obtain repayment from the price of the immovable in the rank of concession
accorded by law to such expenses.
2. He may free himself of these obligations by abandoning his right to the pledge.

2- Pledge of a Movable

Article 1117

A pledge of a movable is only valid against third parties if, in addition to the delivery of the movable pledged, it
is constituted by a written contract adequately setting out the amount of the secured debt and the object of the
pledge and having an established date. The rank of the secured creditor will be fixed in accordance with such
established date.

Article 1118
1. The rules relating to the effects of possession of material movables and of bearer securities apply to the
pledge of a movable.
2. A pledge holder in good faith may, in particular, avail himself of his right of pledge even if the pledgor

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 157
 was not qualified to dispose of the thing pledged. On the other hand, a third party holder in good faith,
even after the date of the pledge, may avail himself of the right he has acquired over the thing pledged.

Article 1119
1. If the thing pledged appears to be in danger of perishing, deteriorating or diminishing in value, to such an
extent that there is a danger that it will not suffice to secure the claim of the pledge holder, and the pledgor
does not apply for the restitution of the thing in exchange for another thing, either the pledge holder or the
pledgor may apply to the judge for authority to sell the thing pledged by public auction or at its value at
the time on the stock exchange or on the market.
2. The judge shall, when authorizing the same, make an order as to the deposit of the price; in such a case
the right of the creditor is transferred from the thing pledged to the price thereof.

Article 1120

If a suitable occasion presents itself for the sale of the thing pledged and the sale is advantageous, the pledgor
may, even before the maturity of the debt, apply to the judge for authority to sell the thing. The judge, when
authorizing the sale, will fix the conditions and make an order as to the deposit of the price.

Article 1121
1. The pledge holder may, upon failure of payment of the debt, apply to the judge for authority to sell the
thing pledged by public auction or at its value at the time on the stock exchange or on the market.
2. The pledge holder may also apply to the judge for an order authorizing him to appropriate the thing
pledged in payment of the debt, the value thereof being charged against him in accordance with an
estimate by experts.

Article 1122

The preceding provisions apply, in so far as they are not incompatible either with provisions of commercial laws
or provisions relating to institutions authorized to lend money on pledge, or with the laws and regulations
governing special cases as to the pledge of movables.

3- Pledge of Debts

Article 1123
1. A pledge of a debt is only valid as regards the debtor upon notification to or acceptance by the debtor of
the pledge, as provided for in Article (305).
2. The pledge is only valid as against third parties if the pledge holder holds the title of the pledged debt. The
rank of the pledge is fixed as at the established date of the notification or of the acceptance of the pledge.

Article 1124

Nominative bonds and bonds payable to order may be pledged in accordance with the special procedure
prescribed by law for the transfer of such bonds, provided that it is stated that the transfer is made by way of
pledge; the contract of pledge is completed without notification being necessary.

Article 1125

A debt that cannot be assigned or attached, cannot be pledged.

Article 1126
1. In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the pledge holder has the right to collect the interest on the
pledged debt which falls due after the constitution of the pledge. He has also the right to collect periodical
payments appertaining to the pledged debt upon condition that he sets off the amounts so collected by him

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 158
 first against expenses, then against the interest and then against the capital of the debt secured by the
pledge.
2. A pledge holder is bound to look to the protection of the pledged debt. If he has the right to collect any
part of the debt without the intervention of the pledgor, he is bound to collect such part of the debt at the
time and place fixed for payment and immediately inform the pledgor thereof.

Article 1127

The debtor of a debt given in pledge may set up against the pledge holder the defenses relative to the validity of
the debt secured by the pledge as well as those defenses he may have against his own creditor, to the extent that
an assigned debtor may set up defenses against the assignee in the case of an assignment of debt.

Article 1128
1. If a pledged debt falls due for payment before the actual debt secured by the pledge, the debtor must
discharge his debt to the pledge holder and the pledgor jointly. The pledge holder and the pledgor may
each demand the debtor to deposit the amount paid by him, in which case the pledge is transferred to the
amount so deposited.
2. The pledge holder and the pledgor must, without prejudice to the rights of the secured creditor, cooperate
together for the investment of the amount paid by the debtor to the best advantage of the pledgor, and they
must immediately constitute a new pledge in favor of the pledge holder.

Article 1129

If the pledged debt and the secured debt fall due, the pledge holder who has not been paid may collect the debt
pledged up to the amount due to him and demand that the debt be sold or be allocated to him in accordance with
the provisions of Article (1121), paragraph 2.

Chapter 4 Concessionary rights

Section 1 General Provisions

Article 1130
1. A concession is a right of preference granted by law to a particular right by reason of its quality.
2. No right is concession except by virtue of a provision of the law.

Article 1131
1. The rank of a concession is fixed by law; in the absence of a formal provision of the law fixing the
preferential rank of a concessionary right it ranks after any other concession provided for in this Chapter.
2. In the absence of a provision of the law to the contrary, concessionary rights of the same rank will be paid
rateably.

Article 1132

General concessions extend to all movable and immovable property of the debtor. Special concessions are
limited to a specific movable or immovable only.

Article 1133
1. A concession cannot be set up against the holder in good faith of a movable.
2. A lessor of an immovable and a hotel proprietor are deemed, in so far as this article applies, to be holders
of furniture used in leased premises and of effects brought into the hotel by travelers respectively.
3. If a creditor has reasonable grounds to apprehend that movables charged with a concession in his favor
will be misappropriated, he may apply for them to be placed in Custodianship.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 159
Article 1134
1. Provisions of the law relating to mortgages are applicable to concessionary rights over immovable
property in so far as they are not incompatible with the nature of these rights. The provisions relating to
purge, to inscription and the effects of inscription, and to renewal and radiation of inscription, are in
particular applicable to concessions over immovables.
2. General concessions, however, even over immovables, are not subject to publication nor do they give a
right of tracing the property into the hands of subsequent holders. Concessions over immovables securing
sums due to the State Treasury are also not subject to publication. All these concessions rank prior to any
other concession over immovables or mortgages, whatever may be the date of their inscription. As
between each other, the concession securing sums due to the State Treasury ranks prior to general
concessions.

Article 1135

Provisions applying to the loss or deterioration of mortgaged property apply also to concessions.

Article 1136

In the absence of a provision of the law to the contrary, concessions are extinguished in the same way and in
accordance with the same rules as a mortgage or a pledge.

Section 2 Kinds of Concessions

Article 1137

In addition to the concessions established by special provisions of the law, the rights enumerated in the
following articles are concessionary.

1- General Concessions and Special Concessions over Movables

Article 1138
1. Costs of legal proceedings incurred, in the common interest of all the creditors, for the preservation and
sale of the property of the debtor, have a concession over the price of such property.
2. Such costs are payable in priority to any other claim, whether concessionary or secured by a mortgage,
including claims of creditors for whose benefit such costs have been incurred. Costs incurred for the sale
of the property are payable in priority to the costs of the procedure of distribution.

Article 1139
1. Sums due to the State Treasury for taxes, duties and other dues of any kind are concessionary in
accordance with conditions laid down by laws and regulations issued in this connection.
2. Such sums shall be paid out of the proceeds of sale of the property charged with this concession, in
whosever's hands it may be, and before all other rights, whether concessionary or secured by a mortgage,
except costs of legal proceedings.

Article 1140
1. Expenses incurred for the preservation of, and repairs of a necessary kind to, a movable are secured by a
concession over the movable as a whole.
2. Such expenses are payable out of the proceeds of sale of the movable so charged, and rank immediately
after the costs of legal proceedings and sums due to the State Treasury. As between them such expenses
will rank in the inverse order of the dates on which they were incurred.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 160
Article 1141
1. The following claims are secured by a concession over all the debtor's property, whether movable or
immovable:
a. Sums due to servants, clerks, workmen and other wage-earners.
b. Sums due for foodstuffs and clothes supplied to the debtor and to persons depending on him during
the last six months.
c. Alimony due by the debtor to members of his family, for the last six months.
2. These claims rank immediately after the costs of legal proceedings, sums due to the State Treasury and
expenses for the preservation of and repairs to the property. As between them such claims are paid
rateably.

Article 1142
1. Sums disbursed for seeds, manure and other fertilizers and insecticides, and sums disbursed for cultivation
and harvesting are secured by a concession over the crop for whose production they are spent: they will all
have the same rank.
2. Such sums are payable out of the proceeds of the sale of the crop, immediately after the claims above
referred to.
3. Sums due in respect of agricultural implements are, in a like manner and in the same rank, secured by a
concession over these implements.

Article 1143
1. House and agricultural rents for two years, or for the duration of the lease if less than two years, and all
sums due to the lessor by virtue of the contract of lease, are secured by a concession over all attachable
movables and crops existing on the leased property and belonging to the lessee.
2. Subject to the provisions relating to stolen or lost property, this concession is enforceable even when the
movables belong to the wife of the lessee or to a third party, as long as it is not established that the lessor
had knowledge, at the time the movables were brought onto the leased property, of the existence of a third
party's rights.
3. This concession is also enforceable over movables and crops belonging to a sub-lessee, if the lessor had
expressly prohibited sub-letting. If sub-letting was not prohibited, the concession will only be enforceable
up to the amount due by the sub-lessee to the principal lessee on the date a formal summons is served by
the lessor upon the sub-lessee.
4. These concessionary claims are payable out of the proceeds of sale of such movables and crops subject to
such concession, immediately after the claims above mentioned, with the exception of claims in respect of
which the concession does not operate as against the lessor in as much as he is a third party holder in good
faith.
5. If movables and crops so charged are removed from the leased property, notwithstanding the objection of
the lessor or without his knowledge, and the movables remaining on the property are not sufficient to
secure the concessionary claims, the concession is enforceable on the movables and crops so removed
subject to rights acquired on these movables and crops by third parties in good faith. The concession shall
remain in force for three years from the date of removal, even to the detriment of a third party's rights, if
the lessor effects within the prescribed time limit an attachment on the movables and crops removed. If,
however, the movables and crops are sold to a purchaser in good faith in the market by public auction or
by a merchant dealing in similar articles, the lessor must reimburse the purchaser with the price.

Article 1144
1. Sums due to hotel proprietors by a traveler for accommodation, food and expenses incurred for his
account, are secured by a concession over the effects brought by the traveler to the hotel or its annexes.
2. Unless it can be shown that the hotel proprietor knew of the existence of a third party's rights over these
effects at the time they were brought on to the premises, this concession may be enforced on these effects,
even if they do not belong to the traveler, provided that they are not lost or stolen property. A hotel
proprietor may, if he has not been paid in full, object to the removal of these effects, and if they are
removed notwithstanding his objection or without his knowledge, the concession continues to be
enforceable on them, subject to the rights acquired by third parties in good faith.
3. A hotel proprietor's concession has the same rank as a lessor's concession. Should the effects in question
be subject to both claims, the first in date will have priority, unless it is not enforceable as against the
other.

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 161
Article 1145
1. Sums due to a Seller of a movable for price and accessories are secured by a concession over the movable
sold. This concession is enforceable as long as the movable sold preserves its identity, subject to the rights
acquired in good faith by third parties and subject to the special provisions applicable in commercial
matters.
2. This concession follows in rank concessions over movables above referred to. It operates, however, as
against the lessor and the hotel proprietor, if it can be proved that they had knowledge of such concession
at the time the thing sold was brought onto the leased property or into the hotel.

Article 1146
1. Co-owners who have partitioned a movable have a concession over this movable in respect of their
respective remedies against each other resulting from partition, and for repayment of any difference
reverting to them in the division.
2. The concession of an in-common partner has the same rank as a Seller's concession. Should the movable
in question be subject to both rights, the first in date will have priority.

2. Special Concessions over Immovables

Article 1147
1. The price and accessories due to the Seller of an immovable are secured by a concession over the
immovable sold.
2. Such concession must be inscribed, notwithstanding the transcription of the sale, and its rank is fixed by
the date of inscription.

Article 1148
1. Sums due to contractors and architects who have been entrusted with the erection, reconstruction, repair
or maintenance of buildings or other works, have a concession over such works but only in respect of the
increase in value resulting from such works as at the time of alienation of the immovable.
2. Such a concession must be inscribed: its rank is fixed by the date of its inscription.

Article 1149

Co-owners who have partitioned an immovable have a concession over this immovable in respect of their
respective remedies against each other resulting from the partition, including their right to claim payment of any
difference reverting to them in the division. This concession must be inscribed: its rank is fixed by the date of its
inscription

Copyright 2020: Thomson Reuters. All Rights Reserved.

Page 162